Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting

AquaSnap®
30MPA,MPW016-071
Liquid Chillers with Scroll Compressors
and ComfortLink Controls
Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting
CONTENTS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Head Pressure Control (30MPW Only) . . . . . . . .41
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Actuator Installation and Operation . . . . . . . . . .42
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Actuator Removal, 30MP016-030, 040-071 . . . . .42
Basic Control Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Actuator Removal, 30MP032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Actuator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Actuator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Actuator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Head Pressure Control Configuration and
Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Expansion Valve (EXV) Board (050-071 only) . . . 7 Condenser Water Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Enable/Off/Remote Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Important Notes about Head Pressure Control .46
Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface . . . . . 13 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) (30MP050-071
Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Condenser Flow Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) . . . . . . . . 16 Compressor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . 17 30MP Cooler and 30MPW Condenser . . . . . . . . .53
Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Water Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Time, Day, and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Oil Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Operation of Machine by Control Method . . . . . 21 Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . .55
Cooling Set Point Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Ice Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Alarm Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chilled Water Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . 27 Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Condenser Pump/Fan Output Control . . . . . . . . 27 Replacing Defective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . 27 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . .64
Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart . . . . . . . . .64
Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES . . . . .85
START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Actual Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION
OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Check Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND
Check Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Adjust Oil Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30MP LIQUID
Evaporator Isolation (All Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300181-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-5T Rev. A Pg 1 11-19 Replaces: 30MP-4T
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be haz- CAUTION
ardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equip-
ment location (elevated structures, mechanical rooms, etc.). Only DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been
trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should install, exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and
start up, and service this equipment. regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any
longer than the actual time required to service the equipment.
When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to
literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equip- prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be com-
ment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safe- pleted. Failure to follow these procedures may result in dam-
ty codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in han- age to equipment.
dling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all elec-
trical components.
WARNING CAUTION
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control sys-
all power to this equipment during installation. There may be tem. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out compo-
more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations nents, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended
to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or
accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or
electrical components.
WARNING
DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. CAUTION
Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accor-
dance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run
National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrig-
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety erant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler fluid
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat exchanger
refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32°F
cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed (0°C). Proof of flow switch is factory installed on all models.
or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shut-
vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, uncon- down periods without taking precaution to remove all water
sciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than from heat exchanger and optional hydronic system. Failure to
air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse
Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition prod- and may result in loss of warranty coverage.
ucts are hazardous.
CAUTION
WARNING
Compressors require specific rotation. Monitor control alarms
DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System during first compressor start-up for reverse rotation protection.
contains oil and refrigerant under pressure. Damage to unit may result.
To remove a component, wear protective gloves and goggles
and proceed as follows:
a. Shut off electrical power to unit. CAUTION
b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from system Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss of
using both high-pressure and low pressure ports. compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.
c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen and
the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in
contact with an open flame produces toxic gases. CAUTION
d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter and
remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher pres-
that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how sures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service
much oil to add to the system. equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. If
service equipment is not rated for Puron refrigerant, equip-
e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when neces- ment damage or personal injury may result.
sary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.
Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal
injury or death.
2
GENERAL Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously
will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or value
This publication contains Start-Up, Service, Controls, Opera-
tion, and Troubleshooting information for the 30MPW water- across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local
cooled chillers and the 30MPA air-cooled chillers. For unit sizes, display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text.
see Table 1. These liquid chillers are equipped with ComfortLink The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also
controls and conventional thermostatic expansion valves (TXVs, referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit
units 30MP016-045) or electronic expansion valves (EXVs, units with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN tables
30MP050-071). The 30MPA units and the 30MPW units with op- are located in Appendix B of the manual.
tional medium temperature brine are also equipped with liquid
line solenoid valves (LLSVs). Basic Control Usage
SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — This device is the key-
CAUTION pad interface used for accessing unit information, reading sensor
This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control sys- values, and testing the unit. The scrolling marquee display is a 4-
tem. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or bypass key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display.
components or otherwise depart from recommended proce- Eleven mode LEDs are located on the display as well as an Alarm
dures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompa- Status LED. See Table 2. For further details, see Appendix A—Lo-
nying wiring may destroy the board or electrical component. cal Display Tables on page 85.
Table 1 — Unit Sizes The scrolling marquee display module provides the user inter-
UNIT MODEL NOMINAL TONS
face to the ComfortLink control system. The display has up and
30MPW016 16
down arrow keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These
30MPA,MPW020 20 keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display
30MPA,MPW030 30 structure. See Appendix A—Local Display Tables on page 85.
30MPW032 32 Press the ESCAPE key until the display is blank to move
30MPA,MPW040 40 through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side
30MPA,MPW045 45 of the display.
30MPA,MPW050 50 Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously
30MPA,MPW055 55 will scroll a clear language text description across the display
30MPA,MPW060 60 indicating the full meaning of each display acronym. Clear lan-
30MPA,MPW065 65 guage descriptions will be displayed in the language of choice.
30MPA,MPW071 71
Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys when the display is
Conventions Used in This Manual blank (Mode LED level) will return the scrolling marquee dis-
The following conventions for discussing configuration points play to its default menu of rotating display items, found under
for the local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory) Run StatusVIEW. In addition, the password will be disabled,
will be used in this manual. requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made
Point names will be written with the mode name first, then any to password protected items. After a period of time with no key
sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow sym- activity, the scrolling marquee will display its default menu of
bol (. Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an ex-
ample, the Minimum Load Valve Select Point, which is located in rotating display items found under Run StatusVIEW.
the Configuration mode, Option 1 sub-mode, would be written as When a specific item is located, the display will flash showing
ConfigurationOPT1 MLV.S. the operator, the item, the item value and then the item units (if
This path name will show the user how to navigate through the any). Press the ENTER key to stop the display at the item value.
local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would Press the ENTER key again so that the item value flashes. Use
scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the and the arrow keys to change the value or state of an item and press the
keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER key to accept it. Press the ESCAPE key and the item,
ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure. value, or units display will resume. Repeat the process as required
When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be for other items.
shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the NOTE: If a value has been forced, the lower right “.” will be
value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be flashing.
shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example, Configu-
rationOPT1MLV.S = YES (Minimum Load Valve Select). See Table 3 and Appendix A for further details.
3
Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*
RUN SERVICE SET TIME OPERATING
MODE TEMPERATURES PRESSURES INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION ALARMS
STATUS TEST POINTS CLOCK MODES
Auto
Service Pressures Cooling General General Display Time of
View of Unit Temperatures Modes Current
Test Mode Circuit A Setpoints Inputs Outputs Configuration Day
Run Status (UNIT) (MODE) (CRNT)
(VIEW) (TEST) (PRC.A) (COOL) (GEN.I) (GEN.O) (DISP) (TIME)
Unit Run Outputs Head Month,

Hour and Temperatures Pressures Pressure
Circuit Outputs Unit Date, Day,
Reset
Start and Pumps Circuit A Circuit B Setpoint Inputs Circuit A Configuration and Year Alarms
(OUTS) (CIR.A) (PRC.B) (CRCT) (CIR.A) (UNIT) (RCRN)
(RUN) (HEAD) (DATE)
Circuit and Circuit A Brine Outputs Daylight
Temperatures 4-20mA Unit Options 1 Alarm
Compressor Comp Freeze Circuit A Savings
Circuit B Inputs Hardware History
Run Hours Test Setpoint EXV Time
(CIR.B) (4-20) (OPT1) (HIST)
(HOUR) (CMPA) (FRZ) (A.EXV) (DST)
Local
Circuit B
Compressor Comp Outputs Unit Options 2 Holiday
Starts Test Circuit B Controls Sched-
(STRT) (CIR.B) (OPT2) ules
(CMPB)
(HOL.L)
Preventive
Circuit A EXV Schedule
Mainte-
SUB-MODE Configuration Number
nance
(EXV.A) (SCH.N)
(PM)
Local
Software CCN Network Occu-
Version Configuration pancy
(VERS) (CCN) Schedule
(SCH.L)
Schedule
Reset Cool Temp
Override
(RSET)
(OVR)
Set Point and
Ramp Load
(SLCT)
Service
Configuration
(SERV)
Broadcast
Configuration
(BCST)
*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be
described in the following format:
Item Expansion (Mode NameSub-mode NameITEM)
For example, using the language selection item:
Language Selection (ConfigurationDISPLANG)
4
Table 3 — Operating Modes
MODE
ITEM EXPANSION DESCRIPTION
NO.
01 CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller.
02 WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.
03 MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL Dual Chiller control is enabled.
RAMP LOAD LIMITED Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature
is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See Cooling
05 Ramp Loading (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if
desired, to any rate from 0.2°F to 2°F (0.1° to 1°C)/minute.
TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed sched-
06 ule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under Local
(Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) control. Override expires after each use.
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Satu-
rated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1°F (0.6°C) in 10 seconds. If the
saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ
07
BR.FZ) minus 6°F (3.4°C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14°F (7.8°C)
for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suction
temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14°F (7.8°C), for 90 seconds, a stage of
capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to decrease capacity as
long as either condition exists.
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Satu-
rated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1°F (0.6°C) in 10 seconds. If the
saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ
08 BR.FZ) minus 6°F (3.4°C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14°F (7.8°C)
for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suction
temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14°F (7.8°C), for 90 seconds, a stage of
capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to decrease capacity as
long as either condition exists.
SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving
09 towards the control point.
10 MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (ConfigurationOPT2DELY).
DUAL SETPOINT Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOL
13 CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)
during unoccupied periods.
TEMPERATURE RESET Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leaving
14 fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point can
be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to 20 mA
signal.
DEMAND LIMITED Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by
15 demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to produce
the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs or a 4 to
20 mA signal.
COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section for
16 definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the Freeze
point.
LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and decreas-
17 ing faster than -0.5°F (-0.3°C) per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point
exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.
HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.
18 Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically
load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.
MAKING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.3)
19
to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.
STORING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOL
20
CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is
greater than the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller
21
capacity may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing
condensing temperature.
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Circuit B Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is
greater than the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller
22
capacity may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing
condensing temperature.
MINIMUM COMP ON TIME Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure proper
23 oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop volume.
PUMP OFF DELAY TIME Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set
by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DY).
24
LEGEND
CSM — Chillervisor System Manager
SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature
WSM — Water System Manager
5
ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE — The the up or down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s
Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the Com- contrast will change with the adjustment. Press ENTER to
fortLink control system. The display has up and down arrow keys, accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this set-
an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These keys are used to ting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.
navigate through the different levels of the display structure. Press Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the dis-
the ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed to play can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory de-
move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the fault is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the Navi-
left side of the display. See Fig. 1. gator module, press the ESCAPE key until the display reads,
Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the currently “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the Configu-
selected item on the display screen. Pressing the ENTER and ration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to this mode. The
ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into display will read:
expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, > TEST OFF
items and their values can be displayed. Pressing the ENTER and METR OFF
ESCAPE keys when the display says ‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LANG ENGLISH
LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default menu of PAS.E ENBL
rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). In ad- Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up or
dition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ENTER
again before changes can be made to password protected items. will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen.
Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously allows the
NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration user to adjust the display brightness. Use the up or down arrow
DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display keys to adjust screen brightness. Press ENTER to accept the
expansions will immediately change to the new language. No change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it
power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring lan- is plugged in to the LEN bus.
guages.
When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the Com
fortL
ink
left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the dis-
play and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display.
Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will be-
gin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value,
MODE
Run Alarm
Status Status
Servic
e Tes
t
Tem
and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key.

peratu
res
Pressu
res
Setpo
ints
Inputs
Outpu
ts
Config
Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the

uration
Time
Clock
Opera ESC
ting
Modes
Alarms
same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press ENTER ENTE
R
so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the
value or state and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the
ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of structure. Re-
peat the process as required for other items.
Fig. 1 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module
Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass- CHANGING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE — The factory de-
word protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed fault language is English. Several other languages are available,
when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default pass- including Spanish, French, and Portuguese.
word is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press Required Configurations — Table 4 shows the required configu-
ENTER to enter the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of rations for Language Selection.
the password. The password can only be changed through CCN Table 4 — LANG (Language Selection)
operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS, Comfort- Required Configurations
VIEW and Service Tool.
SUB- ITEM
ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be ad- MODE DESCRIPTION
justed to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of the DISP LANG X Language Default: 0
Selection Range: 0 to 3
Navigator module, press the ESCAPE key until the display 0=English
reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the 1=Espanol
2=Francais
Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to this 3=Portuguese
mode. The display will read:
NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configura-
> TEST OFF tionDISPLANG) variable is changed, all appropriate display
METR OFF expansions will immediately change to the new language. No
LANG ENGLISH power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring Lan-
PAS.E ENBL guage Selection.
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the CHANGING THE UNITS OF MEASURE — The factory de-
up or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing fault unit of measure is English (for example, °F, ^F, psi). The dis-
play can be changed to metric units (for example, °C, ^C, kPa).
ENTER will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in
the view screen. Pressing ENTER and ESCAPE simulta- Required Configurations — Table 5 shows the required configu-
rations for Metric Display.
neously allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use
6
Table 5 — METR (Metric Display) the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the
Required Configurations control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to the
inputs received.
SUB- ITEM
ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
MODE DESCRIPTION Current Sensor Board (CSB)
DISP METR OFF/ON Metric Display Default: OFF The CSB is used to monitor the status of the compressors by
OFF=English
ON=Metric measuring current and providing an analog input to the main base
board (MBB).
NOTE: When the Metric Display (Configura-
tionDISPMETR) variable is changed, all appropriate display Expansion Valve (EXV) Board (050-071 only)
expansions will immediately change to the new units of measure. The EXV board communicates with the MBB and directly
No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring Met- controls the expansion valves to maintain the correct compressor
ric Display. superheat.
CONFIGURATION AND SERVICE PASSWORD — Items in Enable/Off/Remote Control Switch
the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected.
The words PASS and WORD will flash on the scrolling marquee. The Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is a 3-position switch
Press ENTER for the digits 1111 to be displayed. On the Naviga- used to control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position
tor, press Enter Password and 1111 will be displayed. The the chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off po-
default password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change each num- sition to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the Remote
ber if required and press ENTER to accept the digit. Continue Control position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to
with the remaining digits of the password. start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24
vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Control (dry contacts
Changing Service Password — The password can only be closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to
changed through CCN operator interface software such as Com- the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and set point da-
fortWORKS™, ComfortVIEW™, and Service Tool. Caution ta. See Fig. 7.
should be exercised when changing the password. Once changed,
the only way to determine the password is through one of these Emergency On/Off Switch
devices. To view or change the password, use the CCN Variable The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used when it is
PASSWORD found in Service Configuration/Display. required to shut the chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB,
EMM, EXV, AUX, and marquee display is interrupted when this
CONTROLS switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off.
See Fig. 7.
General
The 30MP liquid scroll chillers contain the ComfortLink elec- Board Addresses
tronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of The main base board (MBB) has a 3-position instance jumper
the chiller. that must be set to 1. The EMM and EXV board has 4-position
The control system is composed of several components as list- DIP switches. All switches are set to ON for all boards except the
ed in the sections below. See Fig. 2 for a typical control box draw- AUX board. The AUX board DIP switch settings are shown on
ing. See Fig. 3 and 4 for power and control schematics. See Table the wiring schematic.
6 for drawing designation. Control Module Communication
Main Base Board (MBB) RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visu-
See Fig. 5. The MBB is the heart of the ComfortLink control ally checked by looking at the red status LEDs. During initial
system. It contains the major portion of operating software and power-up the LED will signal a 1/2-second blink 3 times, followed
controls the operation of the machine. The MBB continuously by a pause. This indicates that the processor is booting. If this pat-
monitors input/output channel information received from its in- tern repeats, it is an indication that the control board is in a contin-
puts and from all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from uous reboot loop and the board should be replaced. When operat-
the discharge and suction pressure transducers and thermistors. ing correctly, the red status LEDs should be blinking in unison at a
See Table 7. The MBB also receives the feedback inputs from rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in
each compressor current sensor board and other status switches. unison, verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules.
See Table 8. The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay out- Be sure that the main control is supplied with the current software.
puts controlled by the MBB are shown in Table 9. Information is If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still persists,
transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or replace the control board. A red LED that is lit continuously or
LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Comfort blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the
Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN and control board should be replaced.
CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal). The In- GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local
stance Jumper must be on “1.” Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking
whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED which
AUX Board (AUX) should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN connec-
The AUX board is used with the digital scroll option (016-045 tions for potential communication errors at the board J3 and/or
only). It provides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll J4 connectors. Communication between modules is accom-
control. See Fig. 6. plished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in parallel
from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB provides
Energy Management Module (EMM) both power and communication directly to the marquee display
The EMM module is available as a factory-installed option or only.
as a field-installed accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carri-
mA inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set er Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times of
point and demand limit functions. The EMM module also re- network communication.
ceives the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand
limit and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates
7
Table 6 — Component, Power, and Control Drawings
30MPA,MPW UNIT DESCRIPTION LOCATION
Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 9
016-071 Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 3, page 10
Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 4, page 11
LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-5

LLSV — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
ACCSY — Accessory LON — Local Operating Network
ALMR — Alarm Relay LVT — Low Voltage Terminal
AUX — Auxiliary LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
C — Contactor, Compressor MBB — Main Base Board
CB — Circuit Breaker MLV — Minimum Load Valve
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker MP — Modular Motor Protection
CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay MTT — Motor Temperature Thermistor
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network MUC — Multi Unit Controller
CEFT — Cooler Entering Fluid Temp NEC — National Electrical Code
CH — Crankcase Heater OAT — Outdoor-Air Thermistor
CLFT — Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor
CNFS — Condenser Water Flow Switch OPT — Option
CNPI — Condenser Pump Interlock PL — Plug
COMP — Compressor RGT — Return Gas Temperature
CR — Control Relay SEN — Sensor
CSB — Current Sensing Board SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch SW — Switch
CWP — Chilled Water Pump TB — Terminal Block
CWPI — Chilled Water Pump Interlock TRAN — Transformer
DGS — Digital Scroll Compressor UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter
DLS — Demand Limit Switch
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer Terminal Block
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor Terminal (Unmarked)
DUS — Digital Unloader Solenoid
EFT — Entering Fluid Temperature Terminal (Marked)
EMM — Energy Management
EWT — Entering Water Temperature Splice
EXV — Expansion Valve Board/Electronic Expansion Valve
FB — Fuse Block Factory Wiring
FIOP — Factory-Installed Option Field Wiring
FU — Fuse
GND — Ground Accessory or Option Wiring
HPS — High-Pressure Switch
To indicate common potential only; not to represent
LEN — Local Equipment Network wiring.
LFT — Leaving Fluid Temperature
8
9
Fig. 2 — Typical Control Box — 30MP016-071 Units
10
Fig. 3 — Typical Power Wiring Schematic — 30MP016-071 Units
Fig. 4 — Typical Control Wiring Schematic — 30MP016-071 Units
11
RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED - YELLOW LED -
LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)
INSTANCE JUMPER
CEPL130346-01
K11 K10 K9
K8 K7 K6 K5
J1 J2 STATUS
2 1
J3 LEN J10
J4
K4 K3 K2 K1
CCN
J5
J6
J7 J8 J9
NOTE: Not to scale.

Fig. 5 — Main Base Board
LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH

SERIAL NUMBER
STATUS SIO (LEN)

D7
D5
ON
Q5
D8
S1
Y1
2
D6
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1
J9
L2
L5
24 VAC
U1
+
1
Q1
100K 100K
D3
2
G
Q60
100K
L3
–
Q12
3
U2
32GB500 442 EE
CEPL130567-03
+
1
U21
Q11
U9
U8
Q10
2
G
U5
U6
U7
U10
–
3
U4
JP2
CH14
J8
CH13
C61
J7
CH13
J4 J5 D12 JP1
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8
J2 J3
J6
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
NOTE: Not to scale.
Fig. 6 — AUX Board
12
Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface plify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the
The 30MP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the sig-
The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable nal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different
with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. See Table colored wires.
10. The system elements are connected to the communication bus At each system element, the shields of its communication bus
in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system ele- cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is entirely
ment communication connector must be wired to the positive pins within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be con-
of the system elements on either side of it. This is also required for nected to a ground at one point only. If the communication bus ca-
the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wir- ble exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be
ing connections for CCN should be made at LVT See Fig. 8 and connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building
consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information. where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American only). To connect the unit to the network:
Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual con- 1. Turn off power to the control box.
ductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Tef- 2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white
lon1, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield (ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate
and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Tef- colors for different colored cables.)
lon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20°C to
3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug, the
60°C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463), white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (–)
American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia (02525) terminal.
meets the above mentioned requirements.
4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is
It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus only intended for temporary connection (for example, a lap-
that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network to sim- top computer running Service Tool).
1. Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.
SCROLLING MARQUEE
DISPLAY
EMERGENCY
ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE
CB1 CB2 CB3 ON-OFF SWITCH
CONTROL SWITCH REMOTE
LEGEND CONTROL OFF
SW1 OFF SW2

CB — Circuit Breaker
SW — Switch ENABLE ON
Fig. 7 — Scrolling Marquee, Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and

Emergency On/Off Switch Locations
Fig. 8 — CCN Wiring Diagram
13
IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some Table 10 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring
routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. PART NO.
If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If condi- MANUFACTURER
Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring
tions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable.
Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus Alpha 1895 —
can cause problems with all system elements on the bus. American A21451 A48301
Belden 8205 884421
Table 7 — Thermistor Designations
Columbia D6451 —
SCROLLING Manhattan M13402 M64430
MARQUEE PIN Quabik 6130 —
THERMISTOR CONNECTION THERMISTOR INPUT
DISPLAY POINT
NAME CURRENT SENSING BOARD (CSB) — The CSB is used to
monitor the status of each compressor by measuring current and
CLWT J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp
providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or com-
CEWT J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid Temp pressor expansion module (CXB).
J6-1,2 (AUX2) Discharge Temperature Therm- ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH — The En-
istor (DTT) (Digital Compressor
D.GAS Option Only for unit size 020- able/Off/Remote Control switch is a 3-position switch used to
045) control the unit. When switched to the Enable position, the unit is
J8-9,10 (MBB) Circuit A Return Gas under its own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut
RGT.A Temperature (accessory, stan- the unit down. Move the switch to the Remote Control position
dard for unit sizes 050-071) and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the unit. The
J8-6,7 (MBB), Outdoor-Air Temperature contacts must be capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA load. In the
OAT/DLWT LVT-21,22 Sensor (accessory) or Dual LWT Enable and Remote Control (dry contacts closed) positions, the
Sensor unit is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configura-
J8-5,6 (MBB) Accessory Remote Space tion, CCN configuration and set point data. See Fig. 7.
LVT-22,23 Temperature Sensor, T55
SPT/RGT.B Accessory/Circuit B Return Gas EMERGENCY ON/OFF SWITCH — The Emergency On/Off
Temperature (accessory, stan- switch should only be used when it is required to shut the unit off
dard for unit size 032)
immediately. Power to the MBB, CXB, AUX, EMM, and scroll-
J8-1,2 (MBB) Condenser Entering Fluid Tem- ing marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all
CDET perature Sensor
(30MPW Only) outputs from these modules will be turned off. See Fig. 7.
J8-3,4 (MBB) Condenser Leaving Fluid HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS) — Each unit is protected
CDLT Temperature Sensor with a high pressure switch to prevent excessive condensing pres-
(30MPW Only) sure. See Table 11 for switch details.
LEGEND
Table 11 — High Pressure Switch
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
MBB — Main Base Board CARRIER PART
OPENS AT CLOSES AT
NUMBER
Table 8 — Status Inputs 650 ± 10 psig 500 ± 15 psig
HK02ZZ001* (4482 ± 69 kPa) (3447 ± 103 kPa)
STATUS SWITCH PIN CONNECTION POINT
HK02ZZ003 558 ± 15 psig 435 ± 29 psig
Condenser Flow Switch LVT-11,17, J7-2, J6-2 (MBB) (384 ± 103 kPa) (2999 ± 200 kPa)
Dual Set Point LVT-12,13, J7-3,4 (MBB) * Available for 30MPA,MPW016-045, 30MPA050-071, 30MPW050-071
Remote On/Off LVT-14,15, J7,8 (MBB) high condensing option.
Cooler Flow Switch Interlock LVT-16,17, J6-2, J7-10 (MBB) PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is
Compressor Fault Signal, A1 J9-11,12 (MBB) equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. The
Compressor Fault Signal, A2/B1 J9-5,6 (MBB)
suction pressure transducers have a yellow body with a pres-
sure range of –6.7 to 420 psig (–46 to 2896 kPa) while the dis-
Compressor Fault Signal, A3 J9-8,9 (MBB) charge transducers have a red body with a pressure range of
Table 9 — Output Relays 14.5 to 667 psig (100 to 4599 kPa). These inputs connect to the
MBB (main base board) and are used to monitor the status of
RELAY NO. DESCRIPTION the unit and to ensure the unit operates within the compressor
K1 Energize Compressor A1 envelope. The transducers are used to protect the compressor
K2 Energize Compressor A2/B1
from operating at too low or too high of a pressure condition.
In some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full capacity.
K3 Energize Compressor A3 The MBB will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as
K4 Energize Minimum Load Valve needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operating
K6 Energize Compressor B1 pressures. Table 12 summarizes pressure transducer
K7 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve characteristics.
K8 Crankcase Heater Relay Table 12 — Pressure Transducer Identification
K9 Chilled Water Pump
CARRIER PART BODY PRESSURE
K10 Condenser Fan/Pump TRANSDUCER RANGE,
NUMBER COLOR psi (kPa)
K11 Alarm Relay
Discharge HK05ZZ001 Red 14.5 to 667
(100 to 4599)
–6.7 to 420
Suction HK05SZ003 Yellow
(–46 to 2896)
14
Sensors and down arrow keys simultaneously. The value will revert to
The electronic control uses 2 to 8 thermistors to sense tem- the actual reading and the flashing “.” or “f” will be removed.
peratures for controlling chiller operation. See Table 7. These DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
sensors are outlined below. Thermistors cooler leaving fluid, (DLWT) — This input can be connected to the LVT. See Table 7.
cooler entering fluid, discharge temperature, circuit A return gas For dual chiller applications (parallel only are supported), connect
temperature, outdoor-air temperature sensor or dual LWT sensor, the dual chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (see Table 13 for
accessory remote space temperature sensor, condenser entering thermistor and well part numbers) to the outside air temperature
fluid temperature sensor, and condenser leaving fluid tempera- input of the Master chiller. If outside-air temperature is required
ture sensor are identical in temperature versus resistance and for reset applications, connect the sensor to the Slave chiller and
voltage drop performance. All thermistors are 5,000 ohms at configure the slave chiller to broadcast the value to the Master
77°F (25°C) except the space temperature thermistor which is chiller. The broadcast must be enabled, (Configura-
10,000 ohms. Space temperature thermistor (SPT) is 10,000 tionBCSTOAT.B=ON). If there are only two units, the mas-
ohms at 77°F (25°C). See Thermistors section on page 55 for ter chiller must be configured to acknowledge the broadcast (Con-
temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics. figurationBCSTBC.AK =ON). If there are more than two
COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (LWT) — The thermistor units, at least one unit must be configured to acknowledge the
is installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping broadcast (ConfigurationBCSTBC.AK =ON).
connecting to the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT) —
COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (EWT) — The thermistor This sensor is only used on units with a digital compressor.
is installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close to the dis-
connecting to the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. charge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the discharge
line using a spring clip and protects the system from high dis-
CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (CDLT) (30MPW charge gas temperature when the digital compressor is used.
Only) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the field-installed This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.
leaving fluid piping connecting to the bottom of the brazed-plate
heat exchanger. The thermistor and well are a field-installed SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR — Space temperature sen-
accessory. The thermistor and well are a field- installed accessory. sors are used to measure the interior temperature of a building.
See Table 13 for thermistor and well part numbers. This sensor Space Temperature can be forced to a value at the scrolling
must be enabled, ConfigurationOPT1CDWS= ENBL. marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, access the pa-
CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (CDET) (30MPW rameter TemperaturesUNITSPT. Press ENTER to view the
Only) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the field-installed current value. Press ENTER again and use the up and down ar-
entering fluid piping connecting to the top of the brazed-plate heat row keys to display the desired value; then press ENTER to ac-
exchanger. See Table 13 for thermistor and well part numbers. cept the value. On the scrolling marquee, the “.” in the lower right
corner will flash. On the Navigator device, a flashing “f” will be
Table 13 — Thermistors and Wells displayed next to the value. To clear the forced value, press
ENTER followed by the up and down arrow keys simultaneous-
THERMISTOR
DESCRIPTION WELL PART NO. ly. The value will revert to the actual reading and the flashing “.”
PART NO.
or “f” will be removed.
3 in., 5,000 ohm
HH79NZ014
Thermistor
10HB50106801 The following type of SPT sensor is available:
4 in., 5,000 ohm • Space temperature sensor (33ZCT55SPT) with timed over-
HH79NZ029 10HB50106802
Thermistor ride button (see Fig. 9)
1-1/2 in.,5,000 ohm
00PPG0000B105A Thermistor 00PPG00000B000A
COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(RGT.A, RGT.B) — This accessory thermistor can be installed
in a well located in the suction line. Use Carrier part number
HH79NZ029. This thermistor is standard for unit sizes 050-071. 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED(+)
For 016-045 this accessory must be enabled, Configura- WHT(GND) CCN COM
tionOPT1RG.EN = ENBL. BLK(-)
OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) — This SEN
sensor is an accessory that is remotely mounted and used for out- TIMED OVERRIDE
SW1
door air temperature reset. See Table 7. Use Carrier part number
BUTTON (SW1)
BRN (GND) SENSOR WIRING
HH79NZ023. If sensor is attached, it must be enabled, (Configu- BLU (SPT)
rationOPT1OAT.E=ENBL) and include broadcast informa-

tion.
Outside Air Temperature can be forced to a value at the
scrolling marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, ac-
cess the parameter TemperaturesUNIT OAT. Press
ENTER to view the current value. Press ENTER again and
use the up and down arrow keys to display the desired value;
then press ENTER to accept the value. On the scrolling mar- Fig. 9 — Space Temperature Sensor
quee, the “.” in the lower right corner will flash. On the Navi- Typical Wiring (33ZCT55SPT)
gator device, a flashing “f” will be displayed next to the value.
To clear the forced value, press ENTER followed by the up
15
All of the above sensors are 10,000 ohms at 77°F (25°C), Type
II thermistors and are connected to the low voltage terminal T-55 SPACE
SENSOR
(LVT). The sensor should be mounted approximately 5 ft (1.5 m)
from the floor in an area representing the average temperature in
the space. Allow at least 4 ft (1.2 m) between the sensor and any 6
corner. Mount the sensor at least 2 ft (0.6 m) from an open door-
CCN+ 5
way.
Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to termi- TO CCN
COMM 1
CCN GND 4
nals in the unit main control box. The space temperature sensor in- BUS (PLUG) 3
cludes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. The AT UNIT
RJ11 connector is used for access into the Carrier Comfort Net- CCN- 2
work® (CCN) at the sensor. 1
To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):
1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the
application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one SEN Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring
terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN termi- to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector
nal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor.
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 3 and 4 on Energy Management Module
LVT located in the unit control box. See Fig. 13. This factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed
accessory is used for the following types of temperature reset,
SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT demand limit, and/or ice features:
• 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires field-
SENSOR supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)
• 4 to 20 mA cooling set point (requires field-supplied 4 to 20
SEN SEN
LVT mA generator)
22 • Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires field-sup-
plied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA
23 load)
• 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to
20 mA generator)
Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature • Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires field-supplied
Sensor Wiring dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA load)
Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sen- See the Temperature Reset and Demand Limit sections on pag-
sor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 con- es 31 and 34 for further details.
nector into the CCN (Fig. 11):
IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector CAUTION
wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus
wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 10 for Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-
acceptable wiring. turer’s control systems due to possible power supply differ-
ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. The two
1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink con-
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color trols use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.) should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating
device is used.
2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space
temperature sensor terminal block. Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection
3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the A proof-of-cooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers.
space temperature sensor.
Condenser Flow Protection
4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space
temperature sensor. A proof-of-condenser flow protection accessory can be field in-
stalled in the condenser water piping of all chillers. The unit must
5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the be configured for the input to be enabled, Configura-
remainder of the CCN communication bus. tionOPT1D.FL.S=ENBL.
In lieu of a single sensor providing space temperature, an averag-
ing sensor array of either 4 or 9 sensors may be employed to pro- Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV)
vide a space temperature as shown in Fig. 12. With this control All 30MP016-045 units are equipped from the factory with con-
scheme, only T55 space temperature sensors (P/N 33ZCT55SPT) ventional TXVs. Two styles of TXVs are employed. The 30MPA
can be used. Total sensor wiring must not exceed 1,000 ft (305 units utilize a 15% bleed port type valve. The 30MPW units do
m). not require a bleed port type valve. The 30MPA units and
NOTE: The Timed Override feature from a space temperature 30MPW units with medium temperature brine also have factory-
sensor requires a single space temperature sensor connected to the installed liquid line solenoids. The liquid line solenoid valves are
unit. This feature does not function when used with averaging not intended to be a mechanical shut-off.
space temperature sensor arrays. The TXV is set at the factory to maintain approximately 8 to
12°F (4.4 to 6.7°C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by
monitoring the proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler. All
TXVs are adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless abso-
lutely necessary.
16
RED RED
BLK BLK
J6
RED RED RED
6
BLK BLK BLK
7
SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SENSOR 4

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 4 SENSOR APPLICATION
J6
RED RED RED
6
BLK BLK BLK
7
SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3

BLK
RED
RED RED
BLK BLK
SENSOR 4 SENSOR 5 SENSOR 6

RED
BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
LEGEND
Factory Wiring
Field Wiring SENSOR 7 SENSOR 8 SENSOR 9
SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 9 SENSOR APPLICATION
Fig. 12 — Space Temperature Averaging
Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) This ratio, Capacity Load/Unload Factor (Run Sta-
All 30MP050-071 units are equipped from the factory with tusVIEWLOD.F) value ranges from –100% to +100%
EXVs. times Deadband Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN).
See Deadband Multiplier on this page for more information. If
The 30MPA and 30MPW units with medium brine tem- the next stage of capacity is a compressor, the control starts
perature brine also have the EXV set at the factory to maintain (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches +100% (–100%)
9°F (5°C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by metering the times Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN). Once a change in capacity
proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler. occurs, a 90-second time delay is initiated and the capacity
The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction stage is held during this time delay.
temperature to 50°F (12.8°C). This makes it possible for the When the unit is at stage zero (Requested Stage Run Sta-
unit to start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overload- tusVIEWSTGE=0) as part of the capacity control routine,
ing the compressor. the control adds a 1.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce
Capacity Control cycling.
Capacity control is determined by the difference between If the unit is equipped with a digital compressor, it is nor-
the leaving fluid temperature and the Control Point (Run Sta- mally the first compressor started. If the lead compressor is a
tusVIEWCTPT) and its rate of change. The Control Point digital compressor, and is enabled and available (not in alarm),
(CTPT) is the current set point modified by a temperature reset the compressor will start fully loaded for 90 seconds prior to
command. This can be from the temperature reset function or starting to cycle between loaded and unloaded. Once the digital
the dual chiller routine. The capacity control routine runs every compressor is on, positive changes in LOD.F will cause the
30 seconds. The algorithm attempts to maintain the Control compressor to load. Negative changes to LOD.F will cause the
Point at the desired set point. Additionally, the control calcu- compressor to unload. This process can occur every 30 sec-
lates a rise per stage knowing which compressor is on, its ca- onds. Changes to the digital loading are not subject to the 90-
pacity and the temperature difference across the cooler (enter- second delay. See Digital Scroll Option on page 36 for addi-
ing fluid temperature minus leaving fluid temperature) to deter- tional information.
mine the best time to turn on or off the next compressor, If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Control, it will
institute Minimum Load Control, or change the digital re- not be active until the unit is on its last stage of capacity. It too
sponse, if equipped. Entering and Leaving fluid temperatures is treated as a stage of compression. As a result, Minimum
can be monitored at the unit's interface device Run Sta- Load Control will be activated when capacity is decreasing,
tusVIEWEWT and Run StatusVIEWLWT. With Requested Stage STGE=1, and Capacity Load/Unload Factor
this information, a capacity ratio is calculated to determine LOD.F= -100% times Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN). See Table
whether to make any changes to the current stage of capacity. 14 for capacity step information.
17
MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed only If Minutes Off Time is active, the control will indicate Operat-
in the network display tables (using Service Tool, Comfort- ing Mode, Minutes Off Time Active (Operating
VIEW™ or ComfortWORKS™ software) and represents the ModesMODEMD10 will indicate YES).
amount of time to elapse before the unit will start its initialization CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following over-
routine. This value can be zero without the machine running in rides will modify the normal operation of the routine.
many situations. These can include being unoccupied, ENABLE/
OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch in the OFF position, CCN not Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband Multi-
allowing unit to start, Demand Limit in effect, no call for cooling plier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN) has a default value of 1.0.
due to no load, and alarm or alert conditions present. If the ma- The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than 1.0, this factor
chine should be running and none of the above are true, a mini- is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor. The larger this
mum off time (DELY, see below) may be in effect. The machine value is set, the longer the control will delay between adding or
should start normally once the time limit has expired. removing stages of capacity. Figure 14 shows how compressor
starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water temperature is
MINUTES OFF TIME — The Minutes Off Time feature allowed to drift a larger amount above and below the set point.
(ConfigurationOPT2DELY) is a user-configurable time This value should be set in the range of 3.0 to 4.0 for systems with
period used by the control to determine how long unit opera- small loop volumes.
tion is delayed after the unit has been enabled. This delay is
initiated following the Enable-Off-Remote Switch being First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero, the
placed in “Enable” position or “Remote” with remote contacts control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding the
closed, or if power is applied/restored to the unit with the En- first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied when
able-Off-Remote Switch in a position that would allow the unit the control is attempting to remove the last stage of capacity.
to operate. Typically, this time period is configured when mul- Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity
tiple machines are located on a single site. For example, this stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature is
gives the user the ability to prevent all the units from restarting close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and moving
at once after a power failure. A value of zero for this variable towards the set point.
does not mean that the unit should be running.
CEBD430351-0396-01C
PWR
J1 J2
CEPL130351-01
J4 J3 LEN
TEST 1
STATUS
J5
J7
J6 TEST 2
GREEN LED - ADDRESS

RED LED - STATUS LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) DIP SWITCH
Fig. 13 — Energy Management Module
18
Table 14 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units
CAPACITY CAPACITY
CONTROL STAGE
30MP UNIT SIZE (Run StatusVIEWSTGE) (% Displacement) (% Displacement)
WITHOUT MINIMUM LOAD VALVE WITH MINIMUM LOAD VALVE
1 40 40/20*
016 2 60 60
3 100 100
1 50 50/25*
020
2 100 100
1 50 50/34*
030
2 100 100
1 50 50/34*
032
2 100 100
1 33 33/21*
040 2 33 33
3 100 100
1 33 33/22*
045 2 33 33
3 100 100
1 50 50/40*
050 2 50 50
3 100 100
1 44 44/35*
055 2 56 56
3 100 100
1 42 42/33*
060 2 58 58
3 100 100
1 38 38/31*
065 2 62 62
3 100 100
1 44 44/33*
071 2 56 56
3 100 100
*Minimum Load Valve energized. Minimum load valve will only be
energized with decreasing capacity. Minimum load valve cannot be
enabled with digital compressor operation on 30MP016-045 units.
2 STARTS
DEADBAND EXAMPLE
47
8
46
45
7
LWT (C)
LWT (F)
44
6 43
42
5 41
0 200 400 600 800 1000
TIME (SECONDS) 3 STARTS
STANDARD
DEADBAND
LEGEND MODIFIED
DEADBAND
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
Fig. 14 — Deadband Multiplier
Ramp Loading — Ramp loading (Configuration Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the
SLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving fluid tem- entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the con-
perature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for trol will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being
Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before decid- used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes
ing to change stages of capacity. The control calculates a tem- an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The
perature difference between the control point and leaving fluid lowest stage will not be removed.
temperature. If the difference is greater than 4°F (2.2°C) and Minimum Load Control — If equipped, the minimum load
the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the con- control is energized only when one compressor is running on
figured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP), the control the circuit and capacity is decreasing.
does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity.
Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent
shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm
19
by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected is Wa- To set the day of the month, Time ClockDATEDOM
ter, the freeze point is 34°F (1.1°C). If the cooler fluid selected is (Day of Month) is the item.
Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set To set the day of the week, Time ClockDATEDAY (Day
PointsFRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only refer- of Week) is the item. This item uses the following convention:
ences leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze point. If 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, etc. This setting is import-
the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the freeze point ant if using the internal schedule.
plus 2.0°F (1.1°C), the control will immediately remove one stage
of capacity. This can be repeated once every 30 seconds. To set the year, Time ClockDATEYEAR (Year of Cen-
tury) is the item. This item follows the convention of a 4-digit
Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to pre- year, such as 2014.
vent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction condi-
tions by removing stages of capacity. The circuit alert condition Table 16 lists the required configurations for these settings.
(T116) compares saturated suction temperature to the configured TIME/DATE BROADCAST — The 30MP unit controls have
Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZBR.FZ). The Brine the ability to broadcast the time and date on the network. If the
Freeze point is a user-configurable value that must be left at 34°F CCN Time/Date Broadcast configuration Configura-
(1.1°C) for fresh water systems. A lower value may be entered for tionBCSTT.D.BC=ON, the control will send the time and
systems with brine solutions, but this value should be set accord- date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this device is on a
ing to the freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to CCN network, it is important to make sure that only one device on
properly set this brine freeze point value may permanently dam- the bus has this configuration set to ON. If more than one time
age the brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode broadcaster is present, problems with the time will occur. If the
7 (Circuit A) to indicate a circuit’s capacity is limited and that unit is installed on a network, another unit must be configured to
eventually the circuit may shut down. be Broadcast Acknowledger, ConfigurationBCSTBC.AK.
Only one unit can be the Broadcast Acknowledger. See Table 17
Time, Day, and Date for required configurations.
Many features of the 30MP controls require that the time, day and DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME — The 30MP controls have the
date be properly set. This is especially helpful when troubleshoot- ability to automatically adjust the time for daylight savings time.
ing alarms, as they are reported with a time and date stamp. Com- To utilize this feature, several items must be configured, including
fortLink controls also have the ability to automatically adjust for a start date and time to add as well as an end date. All items are
daylight savings time, when configured. The unit time and date is found in the Daylight Saving Time sub-mode, Time ClockDST
set at the factory based in the Eastern Time Zone. and the Broadcast sub-mode, ConfigurationBCST. See Table
To set the time, Time ClockTIMEHH.MM (Hour and 18 for required configurations.
Minute) is the item. The time clock is programmed in a 24- hour NOTE: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight
format, 00.00 to 23.59. See Table 15. savings time adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone, the user
To set the month, Time ClockDATEMNTH (Month) is may want to set ConfigurationBCSTT.D.BC to ON to
the item. This item follows the standard convention, 1=Janu- accomplish the daylight savings function. To disable the daylight
ary, 2=February, etc. savings time feature, set T.D.BC to OFF.
Table 15 — Time Required Configuration

TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
24-hour format
TIME HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute
Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Table 16 — Day and Date Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
Range: 1-12
MNTH XX Month of Year
(1=January, 2=February, etc.)
DOM XX Day of Month Range: 1-31
DATE
Range: 1-7
DAY X Day of Week
(1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)
YEAR XXXX Year of Century
Table 17 — Broadcast Required Configurations
CONFIGURATION MODE
Default: Off
T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast Must be set to ON to enable automatic
Daylight Savings Time correction.*
BCST Default: Off
One unit on the network must be set to
BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er ON. The broadcast unit cannot be the
acknowledger.
*Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings time
adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone, the user may want to set
this to ON to accomplish the daylight savings function.
20
Table 18 — Daylight Savings Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
Daylight Savings Start Month
Default: 4 (April)
STR.M XX Month
Range: 1 to 12
Daylight Savings Start Week
STR.W X Week Default: 1
Range: 1 to 5
Daylight Savings Start Day
STR.D X Day Default: 7 (Sunday)
Range: 1 to 7
MIN.A XX Minutes to Add Default: 60
Range: 0 to 99
DST
Daylight Savings Stop Month
STP.M XX Month Default: 10 (October)
Range: 1 to 12
Daylight Savings Stop Week
STP.W X Week Default: 5
Range: 1 to 5
Daylight Savings Stop Day
Default: 7 (Sunday)
STP.D X Day Range: 1 to 7
Default: 60
MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract Range: 0 to 99
CONFIGURATION MODE
Default: Off
BCST T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast Must be set to ON to enable automatic
Daylight Savings Time correction.
Operation of Machine by Control Method a number greater than 0 for local schedule. For unit opera-
This term refers to how the machine is started and stopped. tion, the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the
Several control methods are available to enable and disable Enable or Remote Control position with external contacts
the unit. Machine On/Off control is determined by the con- closed.
figuration of the Control Method, ConfigurationOPT2 For this option to function properly, the correct time, day
CTRL. and date must be set. See the section Time, Day, and Date
ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL — With the control on page 20. The time clock is programmed in a 24-hour for-
method set to Enable-Off-Remote Contact, CTRL=0 mat, 00.00 to 23.59. If configured, the 30MP controls can
(Switch), simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Control automatically adjust the time for daylight savings time. See
switch to the Enable or Remote Control position with exter- the section Daylight Savings Time on page 20.
nal contacts closed will place the unit in an occupied state. If holidays are to be used, they must be configured. Thirty
Under normal operation, the Control Mode (Run Status holidays are provided as part of the local schedules, HD.01
VIEWSTAT) will be 1 (Off Local) when the switch is in through HD.30. Each holiday requires a Holiday Month, Time
the Off position or in the Remote Control position with exter- ClockHOL.LHD.xxMON (Holiday Start Month)
nal contacts open, and will be 5 (On Local) when in the En- where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; the Holiday Start Day
able position or Remote Control position with external con- of Month, Time ClockHOL.LHD.xxDAY (Start Day)
tacts closed. where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; and the Holiday Dura-
tion, Time ClockHOL.LHD.xxLEN (Duration [Days])
OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE — With the control method where “xx” is a number from 1 to 99. Holidays that do not oc-
set to Occupancy, CTRL=2 (Occupancy), the Main Base cur on fixed dates will require annual programming.
Board will use the operating schedules as defined under the
Time Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. If Time In the example shown in Table 19, the following holidays
ClockSCH.N (Schedule Number) is set to 0, the unit will are to be programmed: January 1 for one day, July 4 for one
remain in an occupied mode continuously. day, December 24 for two days.
In either case, and whether operating under a Local Sched- Eight separate time periods, Period 1 through 8, are avail-
ule or under a CCN Schedule, under normal operation, Run able as part of the local schedule. Each period has Monday
StatusVIEWSTAT (Control Mode) will be 1 (Off Local) through Sunday and a Holiday day flag, and occupied and un-
when the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is Off or in Re- occupied times. For example, an occupied time from 6:00 AM
mote Control with the external contacts open. The control to 8:00 PM is desired from Monday through Friday. For Satur-
mode will be 3 (Off Time) when the Enable/Off/Remote Con- day an occupied period from 6:00 AM to 12:00 Noon is de-
trol switch is in Enable or Remote Control with external con- sired. On Sunday and holidays the unit is to remain unoccu-
tacts closed and the time of day is during an unoccupied peri- pied. This schedule is shown graphically in Fig. 15.
od. Similarly, the control mode will be 7 (On Time) when the To program this schedule, Time ClockSCH.N (Schedule
time of day is during an occupied period. Number) must change from 0 to a number between 1 and 64. In
Local Schedule — Local Schedules are defined by schedule this example, the Schedule Number will be 1. Two of the eight
numbers from 1 to 64. All of these schedules are identical. time periods are required to create this schedule. See Table 20.
The schedule number (Time ClockSCH.N) must be set to
21
Table 19 — Holiday Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE SUB- ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SUBMODE
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0 to 12
(0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)
Example = 1
Default: 0
Range: 0-31
HD.01 DAY XX Start Day (0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN XX Duration (Days)
(0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0-12
Example = 7
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 31
HOL.L HD.02 DAY XX Start Day (0=Not Used)
Example = 4
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
LEN XX Duration (Days)
(0=Not Used)
Example = 1
Default: 0
MON XX Holiday Start Month Range: 0 to 12
Example = 12
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 31
HD.03 DAY XX Start Day
(0=Not Used)
Example = 24
Default: 0
LEN XX Duration (Days) Range: 0 to 99
(0=Not Used)
Example = 2
22
Table 20 — Occupancy Schedule Required Configurations
TIME CLOCK MODE
SUBMODE SUB- ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
SUBMODE
Default: 0
SCH.N XX Schedule Number XX Range: 0 to 99
Example = 1
Default: 00.00
OCC.1 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Example = 06.00
Default: 00.00
UNC.1 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Example = 20.00
Default: NO
MON.1 YES/NO Monday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday in Period Example = YES
WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday in Period Default: NO
PER.1 Example = YES
Default: NO
THU.1 YES/NO Thursday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
FRI.1 YES/NO Friday in Period Example = YES
SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday in Period
Example = NO
Default: NO
HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday in Period Example = NO
SCH.L
Default: 00.00
OCC.2 XX.XX Period Occupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Example = 06.00
Default: 00.00
UNC.2 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time Range: 00.00 to 23.59
Example = 12.00
Default: NO
MON.2 YES/NO Monday in Period Example = NO
TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
PER.2 WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday in Period
Example = NO
Default: NO
THU.2 YES/NO Thursday in Period Example = NO
FRI.2 YES/NO Friday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
Default: NO
SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday in Period
Example = YES
Default: NO
SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday in Period Example = NO
HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday in Period Default: NO
Example = NO
23
MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY HOLIDAY
12:00 AM
3:00 AM
6:00 AM
9:00 AM
12:00 PM
3:00 PM
6:00 PM
9:00 PM
12:00 AM
LEGEND
— Occupied
Fig. 15 — Example Schedule
CCN Global Schedule — Schedule Numbers, Time Clock device, the number of hours requested must be set in Time
SCH.N from 65 to 99 indicate operation under a CCN Global ClockOVROVR.T (Timed Override Hours). See Table 22.
Schedule. For unit operation based on a CCN Global Schedule, Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will resume
the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the Enable or an occupied period for the duration of the time programmed. The
Remote Control position with external contacts closed. number of hours in the override time period will be displayed in
In the example in Table 21, the CCN Global Schedule the unit OVR.T and will count down as the time period progresses. This
is to follow is 65. To set up the unit to follow this schedule, Time value cannot be changed until the override period has expired or is
ClockSCH.N must be modified. canceled. The override time period can be canceled by changing
Any unit can be the Global Schedule Broadcaster. When us- the OVR.T value to 0. This can be done at the unit’s interface de-
ing a Global Broadcast Schedule, the schedule broadcaster must vice or through CCN communications by writing to the point
have the Global Schedule Broadcast, Configuration OVR_EXT.
BCSTG.S.BC=ON and all other devices on the network Table 22 — Timed Override Required Configuration
should have their Global Schedule Broadcast flag set to Config-
urationBCSTG.S.BC=OFF. There can be only one broad- TIME CLOCK MODE
caster of a specific schedule. The unit set to be the schedule ITEM
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
broadcaster must have a schedule number from 65 to 99, and the DESCRIPTION
Local Schedule must be configured as described above. It will OVR OVR.T X
Timed Override Default: 0
broadcast the internal time schedule once every 2 minutes. Hours Range: 0 to 4
Table 21 — CCN Global Schedule Required Timed Override from Space Temperature Sensor with Override
Configuration Button — A timed override period can be initiated using a space
temperature sensor with an override button from the space.
TIME CLOCK MODE NOTE: This feature requires a single space temperature sensor
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM COMMENT connected to the unit. It does not function when used with averag-
DESCRIPTION
ing space temperature sensor arrays.
Default: 0
SCH.N XX
Schedule
Range: 0 to 99 To configure this feature, Time ClockOVROVR.L (Over-
Number XX
Example = 65 ride Time Limit) must be set to a non-zero value. This determines
Timed Override — There are several ways to override the occu- the maximum number of hours the override period can extend an
occupied period when the override button is pushed. This item has
pancy schedule to keep the unit in an occupied period. Schedule
a range of 0 to 4 hours and should be set to the limit desired for the
overrides can be initiated at the unit’s interface with either the override period. See Table 23.
scrolling marquee or Navigator™ device, from a space tempera-
ture sensor equipped with a timed override button (see unit Instal- Pressing the override button on the Space Temperature Sensor
lation Instructions for selection and wiring information), or will initiate an override period. The override button must be
through CCN communications. Initiation of an override period pressed for 2 to 4 seconds for the control to acknowledge the call.
can only be accomplished if the unit is in an unoccupied period. If The control will ignore a momentary press of the override button.
Timed Override is in effect, Operating Modes However, if the override button is held for longer than 4 seconds, a
MODEMD06, Timed Override in Effect will be active. Over- Space Temperature Thermistor Failure alarm will be generated.
ride expires after each initiation. The number of hours in the override time period will be displayed
in Time ClockOVROVR.T (Timed Override Hours) and will
Timed Override from Scrolling Marquee/Navigator Device — A
count down as the time period progresses. See Table 22.
timed override period can be initiated with the unit’s interface
device. To initiate an override period from the unit’s interface
24
Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will resume DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on Cooling
an occupied period for the duration of the time programmed. The Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) during the Occupied
number of hours in the override time period will be displayed in mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)
OVR.T and will count down as the time period progresses. This during the Unoccupied mode as configured under the local occu-
value cannot be changed until the override period has expired or is pancy schedule accessible only from CCN. Schedule Number in
canceled. The override time period can be canceled by changing Table SCHEDOVR (see Appendix B) must be configured to 1. If
the OVR.T value to 0. This can be done at the unit’s interface de- the Schedule Number is set to 0, the unit will operate in a continu-
vice or through CCN communications by writing to the point ous 24-hr Occupied mode. Control method must be configured to
OVR_EXT. 0 (switch). See Table 24.
Table 23 — Space Temperature Override Required 4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external 4
Configuration to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module
(EMM).
TIME CLOCK MODE
ITEM
Ice Mode
SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY COMMENT
DESCRIPTION When Ice Mode is enabled, Cooling Setpoint Select must be
OVR OVR.L X
Override Time Default: 0 set to Dual Switch, Dual 7 day or Dual CCN Occupied and the en-
Limit Range: 0 to 4 ergy management module (EMM) must be installed. Unit opera-
Timed Override from CCN — A timed override period can be ini- tion is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP.1) during the Occupied
tiated through CCN communications by writing to the point mode, Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) during the Unoccupied mode with the
OVR_EXT. This point has a range of 0 to 4 hours and should be Ice Done contacts open and Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) during the
set for the desired amount of time. Unoccupied mode with the Ice Done contacts closed. These 3 set
points can be utilized to develop your specific control
The number of hours in the override time period will be dis- strategy. Ice Mode is not compatible with the Multi-Chiller
played in Time ClockOVROVR.T (Timed Override Hours) Controller Accessory Panel.
and will count down as the time period progresses. See Table 22.
Table 24 illustrates how the control method and cooling set
Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will resume point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the set
an occupied period for the duration of the time programmed. The point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the ON/OFF
number of hours in the override time period will be displayed in state of the machine for the given combinations.
OVR.T and will count down as the time period progresses. This
value cannot be changed until the override period has expired or is Cooler Pump Control
canceled. The override time period can be canceled by changing The AquaSnap® 30MP machines are configured with the Cool-
the OVR.T value to 0. This can be done at the unit’s interface de- er Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON.
vice or through CCN communications by writing to the point
OVR_EXT. The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump Start-
er is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil is pow-
CCN CONTROL — With the control method set to CCN Con- ered from the chiller control system. The starter should be wired
trol, CTRL=3 (CCN), an external CCN device controls the On/ between LVT 24 and TB3-1. If equipped, the field-installed
Off state of the machine. This CCN device forces the point chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should be connected
CHIL_S_S between Start/Stop to control the unit. in series with the chilled water flow switch between LVT 16 and
Under normal operation, Run StatusVIEWSTAT (Con- LVT 17.
trol Mode) will be 1 (Off Local) when the Enable/Off/Remote
Control switch is in the Off position or in the Remote Control po- Alarm Routing
sition with the remote external contacts open. With the Enable/ A CCN feature within the 30MP units allows for alarm broadcast-
Off/Remote Control switch in the Enable position or in Remote ing.
Control position with the remote external contacts closed, the ALARM ROUTING CONTROL — Alarms recorded on the
Control Mode will be 2 (Off CCN) when the CHIL_S_S variable 30MP unit can be routed through the CCN. To configure this
is “Stop.” Similarly, the control mode will be 6 (On CCN) when option, the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine
the CHIL_S_S variable is “Start.” which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for
Units controlled via communications by a separate third- party the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to
building automation system through a translator or UPC Open either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent
Controller must be set to CCN Control, CTRL=3. If the unit is to to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all
be monitored only via communications, CTRL=3 (CCN Control) digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory default is
is not required. 00000000. See Figure 16. The default setting is based on the
Emergency Stop — A controls feature exists to shut down the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If the
machine in the event of an emergency. Writing to the CCN Point network does not contain a ComfortVIEW™, Comfort-
EMSTOP, the command “EMSTOP” will force the machine to WORKS™, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink module, enabling
stop all mechanical cooling immediately and shut down. While this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN com-
this feature is enabled, the Control Mode Run Sta- munication bus.
tusVIEWSTAT=4 (Emergency) will be displayed. For the The CCN Point ALRM_CNT is the variable and can be modi-
machine to operate normally, the EMSTOP point value should be fied with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only.
“ENABLE.” It cannot be modified with the scrolling marquee or Navigator™
display.
Cooling Set Point Select Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is
SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set 11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to
PointsCOOLCSP.1). ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK.
DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point Alarm routing is not supported with the LON Translator.
1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set Point switch
contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set
PointsCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed.
25
Table 24 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points
Occupancy Active Set
Control Type CCN Chiller Set Point Select Ice Mode Ice Done Status Dual Set Point
(CTRL) CHIL_S_S (CLSP) (ICE.M)* (ICED)* Switch (DUAL) State Point
(OCC) (SETP)
0 (Single) — — — — CSP.1
— — OFF — CSP.1
— — ON — CSP.2
1 (Dual Switch)† — OFF — CSP.1
ENBL ON ON — CSP.2
OFF ON — CSP.3
0 (Switch) — — — — YES CSP.1
— — — NO CSP.2
2 (Dual CCN
— — YES CSP.1
Occupied)
ENBL ON — NO CSP.2
OFF — NO CSP.3
3 (4 to 20 mA
Input)* — — — — 4-20 mA
— — — YES CSP.1
0 (Single)
— — — NO Off
— — OFF YES CSP.1
— — ON YES CSP.2
— — — NO Off
1 (Dual Switch)†
1 or 2 — OFF YES CSP.1
—
(Occupancy) ENBL — ON YES CSP.2
— — NO Off
2 (Dual CCN — — — — Illegal
Occupied)
3 (4 to 20 mA — — — YES 4-20 mA
Input)* — — — NO Off
Stop — — — — — Off
0 (Single) — — — — CSP.1
— — OFF — CSP.1
— — ON — CSP.2
1 (Dual Switch)† — OFF — CSP.1
ENBL ON ON — CSP.2
OFF ON — CSP.3
3 (CCN)
Start — — — YES CSP.1
— — — NO CSP.2
2 (Dual CCN
— — YES CSP.1
Occupied)
ENBL ON — NO CSP.2
OFF — NO CSP.3
3 (4 to 20 mA
Input)* — — — — 4-20 mA
* Energy management module (EMM) required for operation.

† Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.
DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT
Building Supervisor,
ComfortVIEW™,
ComfortWORKS™,
BACnet Communications (UPC),
BACnet Translator
TeLink,
Autodial Gateway
Unused
Alarm Printer interface Module,

BACLink or DataLINK™
Unused
Fig. 16 — Alarm Routing Control
26
ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY — The ComfortVIEW within five (5) minutes of starting, an A200 - Cooler Flow/Inter-
software uses the equipment priority value to determine the order lock failed to close at Start-Up alarm1 will be generated and
in which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is chiller will not be allowed to start.
the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7 If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow switch
would appear last when sorted. For example, if two units send out opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being closed, an
identical alarms, the unit with the higher priority would be listed A201 - Cooler Flow 1 Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal
first. The default is 4. The CCN point EQP_TYPE is the variable Operation alarm will be generated and the machine will stop.
and can be changed when using ComfortVIEW software or Net-
work Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the Condenser Pump/Fan Output Control
scrolling marquee or Navigator display. The main base board (MBB) has the capability to control either
COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME — This a condenser fan output or a condenser pump output depending on
variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to the unit configuration.
elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is If the unit is configured for ConfigurationUNITTYPE =
not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which 2 (air cooled), then the output will be off as long as capacity is
may be either ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowl- equal to 0 and will be energized 5 seconds before a compressor is
edgment is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after started and remain energized until capacity is 0 again.
the number of minutes specified in this decision. The factory
default for this item is 10 minutes with a range of 1 to 254 If the unit is configured for ConfigurationUNITTYPE =
minutes. The CCN Point RETRY_TM is the variable and can 3 (water cooled), then the output will be used for condenser pump
be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service control and additional configuration is required. To enable the
Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling condenser pump control, use ConfigurationOPT1D.PM.E.
marquee or Navigator display. The pump can be configured for no pump control (0), on when
occupied (1), and on when capacity is greater than 0 (2).
RE-ALARM TIME — This variable specifies the amount of
time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A re-alarm Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control
occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm continue The dual chiller routine is available for the control of two units
to persist for the number of minutes specified in this decision. Re- supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This control algorithm
alarming will continue to occur at the specified interval until the is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement only. One chiller
condition causing the alarm is corrected. To disable this feature, must be configured as the master chiller, the other as the slave. An
set the variable to 255. The factory default is 30 minutes with a additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT)
range of 1 to 254. The CCN Point RE-ALARM is the variable must be installed as shown in Fig. 17 and 18 and connected to the
and can be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network master chiller. Refer to Sensors section, page 15, for wiring. The
Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the CCN communication bus must be connected between the two
scrolling marquee or Navigator display. chillers. Connections can be made to the CCN screw terminals on
ALARM SYSTEM NAME — This variable specifies the sys- LVT. Refer to Carrier Comfort Network® Interface section, page
tem element name that will appear in the alarms generated by the 13, for wiring information. Configuration examples are shown in
unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters Tables 25 and 26.
long and should be unique to the unit. The factory default is Refer to Table 25 for dual chiller configuration. In this example
SPLIT. The CCN point ALRM_NAM is the variable and can be the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and the slave
changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers must reside on
only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee the same CCN bus (ConfigurationCCN CCNB) but cannot
or Navigator display. have the same CCN address (ConfigurationCCNCCNA).
Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation Both master and slave chillers must have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable
(ConfigurationRSET LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/
At anytime the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one Slave Select (ConfigurationRSETMSSL) must be config-
of the following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be en- ured to MAST for the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also
abled. in this example, the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/
1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE, (CTRL=0). Lag Balance Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) and Lead/
2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a Start-Stop Lag Balance Delta (ConfigurationRSETLLBD) to even
remote control closure (CTRL=0). out the chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (Configu-
3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule in rationRSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This
combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2). will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller has
4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination with been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Parallel
items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3). configuration (ConfigurationRSETPARA) can only be
configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and LLDY are
Certain alarm conditions and Operating Modes will turn the not used by the slave chiller.
cooler pump relay ON. This sequence will describe the normal op-
eration of the pump control algorithm. Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configuration of
Control Method (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL) of the Master
When the unit cycles from an ON state to an OFF state, the chiller. The Slave chiller should always be configured for
cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler Pump CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled by Remote
Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DY). The delay is Controls, both Master and Slave chillers should be enabled togeth-
configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default is 1 minute. er. Two separate relays or one relay with two sets of contacts may
If the pump output was deenergized during the transition period, control the chillers. The Enable/Off/Remote Control switch
the pump output will not be energized. should be in the Remote Control position on both the Master and
The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the machine is Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/Remote Control switch should be
ON. The chilled water pump interlock circuit consists of a chilled in the Enable position for CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3
water flow switch and a field-installed chilled water pump inter- (CCN Control).
lock. If the chilled water pump interlock circuit does not close
27
Table 25 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)
SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
DISP
UNIT
OPT1
ENTER CTRL CONTROL METHOD
OPT2 CTRL ENTER 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0
ESCAPE OPT2
CCN
CCNA
ENTER 1 CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1
CCNB
CCN
ENTER 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0
CCNB
ESCAPE CCN
RSET PROCEED TO
SUBMODE RESET
ENTER CRST COOLING RESET TYPE
LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS
ENTER DSBL SCROLLING STOPS
LLEN ENTER DSBL VALUE FLASHES
ENBL SELECT ENBL
ENTER ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE LLEN
MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT
MSSL ENTER MAST MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST
ESCAPE MSSL
RSET
SLVA SLAVE ADDRESS
ENTER 0 SCROLLING STOPS
ENTER 0 VALUE FLASHES

SLVA
2 SELECT 2
ENTER 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE SLVA
LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT
ENTER 0 SCROLLING STOPS

LLBL
2 SELECT 2 - Automatic
28
Table 25 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)
ENTER 2 LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBL
ESCAPE LLBL
LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA
LLBD ENTER 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168
ESCAPE LLBD
LLDY LAG START DELAY

RSET
5 SCROLLING STOPS
(Cont)
ENTER
LLDY 10 SELECT 10
ENTER 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE LLDY
ESCAPE RSET
PARA ENTER YES MASTER COMPLETE
NOTES:
1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.
2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.
29
Table 26 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)
DISP
UNIT
OPT1
ENTER CTRL CONTROL METHOD
OPT2 CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0
ESCAPE OPT2
CCN
CCNA
CCNA ENTER 1 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS
SELECT 2
2
(SEE NOTE 2)
CCN
CCNA ENTER 2 CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE CCN
CCNB ENTER 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

(SEE NOTE 3)
ESCAPE CCN
PROCEED TO
RSET SUBMODE RSET
ENTER CRST COOLING RESET TYPE
LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS
LLEN ENTER DSBL SCROLLING STOPS
ENTER DSBL VALUE FLASHES
ENBL SELECT ENBL
LLEN ENTER ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE LLEN
RSET
MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT
MSSL ENTER MAST SCROLLING STOPS
ENTER MAST VALUE FLASHES
SLVE SELECT SLVE
MSSL ENTER SLVE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED
ESCAPE MSSL
ESCAPE RSET SLAVE COMPLETE
NOTES:
1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.
2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.
3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master
4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.
30
Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/Re- space temperature (SPT), or from an externally powered 4 to 20
mote Control switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency mA signal. Accessory sensors must be used for SPT reset
Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master (33ZCT55SPT) and for OAT reset (HH79NZ014). The energy
chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode. If management module (EMM) must be used for temperature reset
the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generat- using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 27 and 28.
ed on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in a
Stand-Alone mode. IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with
other control systems due to possible power supply differ-
The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its
Control Mode (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) and its operating ences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Con-
nection of control devices with different power supplies
setpoint or Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCT.PT). may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls
THERMISTOR incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A
WIRING signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal gen-
RETURN MASTER LEAVING erator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.
FLUID CHILLER FLUID
SLAVE To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four vari-
CHILLER ables must be configured. In the Configuration mode under
the sub-mode RSET, items (ConfigurationRSET
INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT
LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE
THERMISTOR (T10) HERE* CRST), (ConfigurationRSETRM.NO), (Configura-
*See Fig. 18 for thermistor and well part numbers. tionRSETRM.F), and (ConfigurationRSET
RT.DG) must be properly set. See Table 29 — Configuring
Fig. 17 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air
reset example provides 0°F (0°C) chilled water set point reset
at 85°F (29.4°C) outdoor-air temperature and 15°F (8.3°C)
A
0.505/0.495
reset at 55°F (12.8°C) outdoor-air temperature. The space
B 0.61 temperature reset example provides 0°F (0°C) chilled water
DIA set point reset at 72°F (22.2°C) space temperature and 6°F
(3.3°C) reset at 68°F (20°C) space temperature. The variable
CRST should be configured for the type of reset desired. The
6” MINIMUM variable RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset
1/4 N.P.T.
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR
should occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the tem-
REMOVAL perature that maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG
should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. Fig-
10HB50106801 and 10HB50106802 ures 19 and 20 are examples of outdoor air and space tem-
perature resets.
B
To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the
Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST,
(9.53)
0.38
RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 30 —

(6.35)
0.25
Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example provides

5°F (2.8°C) chilled water set point reset at 2°F (1.1°C) cooler T
and 0°F (0°C) reset at 10°F (5.6°C) cooler T. The variable
RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T)
where no chilled water temperature reset should occur. The vari-
able RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature difference where
A the maximum chilled water temperature reset should occur. The
variable RM.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset
Brass Thermistor Well — 00PPG000008000A desired.
To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run Sta-
tus mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the Active Setpoint (Run
PART DIMENSIONS in. (mm) StatusVIEWSETP) from the Control Point (Run Sta-
NUMBER A B tusVIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees reset.
10HB50106801 3.10 (78.7) 1.55 (39.4) Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant
10HB50106802 4.10 (104.1) 1.28 (32.5) leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled
00PPG000008000A 2.32 (58.86) 1.31 (33.28) fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler
fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 21.
Fig. 18 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point
are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the
Temperature Reset fluid temperature set point may be colder than required. If the
The control system is capable of handling leaving-fluid tem- leaving fluid temperature were allowed to increase at part load,
perature reset based on return cooler fluid temperature. Because the efficiency of the machine would increase.
the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the Return fluid reset allows for the leaving temperature set point
building load, the return temperature reset is in effect an average to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid temperature or,
building load reset method. The control system is also capable of in effect, the building load (See Fig. 22).
temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT),
31
Table 27 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control
MODE KEYPAD SUB-MODE KEYPAD ITEM DISPLAY ITEM COMMENT
(RED LED) ENTRY ENTRY EXPANSION
ENTER DISP
UNIT
OPT1
OPT2
CCN
EXV.A
CONFIGURATION
RSET
SLCT ENTER
CLSP 0 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT
ENTER
0 Scrolling Stops
ENTER
0 Flashing ‘0’
3 Select ‘3’
ENTER
3 Change Accepted
Table 28 — 4 to 20 mA Reset
KEYPAD ITEM
SUB-MODE ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY EXPANSION COMMENT
RSET 0 = no reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA input
COOLING RESET 2 = Outdoor air temp
ENTER
CRST 1 TYPE 3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
MA.DG 5.0 F DEGREES COOL Default: 0°F (0°C) Reset at 20 mA
(2.8 C) RESET Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)
NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4
to 20 mA reset. No reset will occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0°F reset
will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM (energy management module) is
required.
Table 29 — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset
DISPLAY
MODE KEYPAD SUB- KEYPAD ITEM
(RED LED) ENTRY MODE ENTRY ITEM Outdoor EXPANSION COMMENT
Air Space
ENTER DISP
UNIT
OPT1
OPT2
CCN
EXV.A
CONFIGURATION 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
RSET ENTER CRST 2 4 COOLING RESET (Connect to LVT-4,5)
TYPE 4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to LVT-3,4)
Default: 125.0°F (51.7°C)
REMOTE - NO
RM.NO 85 F 72 F RESET TEMP Range: 0° to125°F
(–17.8 to 51.7°C)
Default: 0.0°F (-17.7°C)
RM.F 55 F 68 F REMOTE - FULL Range: 0° to125°F
RESET TEMP
(–17.8 to 51.7°C)
REMOTE - DEGREES Default: 0°F (0°C)

RM.DG 15 F 6 F Range: –30 to 30 F
RESET (–16.7 to -16.7°C)
32
Table 30 — Configuring Return Temperature Reset
MODE KEYPAD SUB-MODE KEYPAD ITEM DISPLAY ITEM COMMENT
(RED LED) ENTRY ENTRY EXPANSION
ENTER DISP ENTER TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDs
UNIT ENTER TYPE X UNIT TYPE
OPT1 ENTER FLUD X COOLER FLUID
OPT2 ENTER CTRL X CONTROL METHOD
CCN
EXV.A
0 = No Reset
CONFIGURATION 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)
(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)
RSET ENTER CRST 3 COOLING RESET TYPE 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to TB5-5,6)
Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)
RT.NO 10.0 F RETURN FLUID - NO Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER DT
RESET TEMP
(0.0 to 16.7°C)
RETURN FLUID - FULL Default: 0 F (–17.8 C)

RT.F 2.0 F Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER DT
RESET TEMP (0.0 to 16.7°C)
RETURN - DEGREES Default: 0 F (0 C)
RT.DG 5.0 F
RESET Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7°C)
12.2 54
11.1 54
LWT TEMPERATURE (C)
LWT TEMPERATURE (F)

10.0 50
T
EW
8.9 48
DESIGN RISE
7.8 46
LWT
6.7 44
SET POINT — 44 F
DESIGN RISE — 10 F
5.6 42
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% UNIT LOADING
LEGEND
LEGEND EWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature
LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature
Fig. 19 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset Fig. 21 — Standard Chilled Fluid

Temperature Control — No Reset
10
9
DESIGN RISE
8
Reset Amount (°F or °C)
CHANGE IN CHILLED
6
RT.F = 2 FLUID, ΔT
5
3
CHANGE IN
2 LIMIT SETPOINT RT.DG = 5
RESET AMOUNT RT.NO = 10
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ΔT (°F or °C), Entering Fluid Temperature - Leaving Fluid Temperature
LEGEND Fig. 22 — Return Fluid Reset

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature
Fig. 20 — Space Temperature Reset
33
Demand Limit To disable demand limit, configure DMDC to 0. See
Demand limit is a feature that allows the unit capacity to be lim- Table 31.
ited during periods of peak energy usage. Three types of demand EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA
limiting can be configured. The first type is through 2-stage switch Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA con-
control, which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-config- trol, set the Demand Limit Select (Configura-
urable percentages. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input tionRSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand Limit
which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at 20 mA (ConfigurationRSETDM20) to the maximum
at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an externally
level at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Load- powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block LVT, terminals 7
shed module and has the ability to limit the current operating ca- and 8 (+,–). Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these connec-
pacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required. tions to the optional/accessory energy management module and
NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input signal terminal block. The control will reduce allowable capacity to
types of demand limiting require the energy management module this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 31 and Fig. 23.
(EMM).
For units with the digital compressor option, digital operation
CAUTION
is ignored when determining capacity limit of the machine. Since Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-
Demand Limit controls the number of compressors operating, the turer’s control systems due to possible power supply differ-
requested demand limit must allow for the corresponding capacity ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. The two
of the full digital compressor capacity plus any remaining com- different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink con-
pressors. For example, a 30MP045 unit with a digital compressor trols use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device
will require a demand limit of at least 33% for the first compressor should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating
to be energized. No compressor operation will be allowed prior to device is used.
this demand limit level. Digital operation below 33% will require
a demand limit of at least 33% to allow a compressor to start. Dig- DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To config-
ital operation between 33 and 67% will require a demand limit of ure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the Demand
at least 67% to allow 2 compressors to be operating. Finally, for Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 3. Then con-
digital operation above 67%, demand limit must be at 100% to al- figure the Loadshed Group Number (Configura-
low for all compressors to be operating. tionRSETSHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (Configura-
To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to tionRSETSHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time (Config-
use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the urationRSETSHTM). See Table 31.
type selected. The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN sys-
DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To config- tem designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a Redline
ure demand limit for 2-stage switch control, set the Demand command from the Loadshed control. When the Redline com-
Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 1. Then con- mand is received, the current stage of capacity is set to the maxi-
figure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Configura- mum stages available. Should the loadshed control send a Load-
tionRSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2) to shed command, the ComfortLink controls will reduce the current
the desired capacity limit. See Table 31. Capacity steps are con- stages by the value entered for Loadshed Demand delta. The Max-
trolled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to LVT as shown in imum Loadshed Time is the maximum length of time that a load-
Fig. 4. shed condition is allowed to exist. The control will disable the
For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first Redline/Loadshed command if no Cancel command has been re-
stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand ceived within the configured maximum loadshed time limit.
limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity en- Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)
tered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing con-
tacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from ex- A field supplied and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA
ceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set point. signal can be used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set
The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes pri- point. Connect the signal to LVT-10,8 (+,–). See Table 31 for in-
ority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If the demand limit structions to enable the function. Figure 24 shows how the 4 to 20
percentage does not match unit staging, the unit will limit capacity mA signal is linearly calculated on an overall 10°F to 80°F range
to the closest capacity stage. for fluid types (ConfigurationOPT1 FLUD) 1 or 2. The set
point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the
chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.
100
50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA
MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)
80
60
40 100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA
75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT
Fig. 23 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting
34
Table 31 — Configuring Demand Limit
KEYPAD KEYPAD
MODE SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT
ENTRY ENTRY
CONFIGURATION ENTER DISP ENTER TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs
UNIT ENTER TYPE X Unit Type
OPT1 ENTER FLUD X Cooler Fluid
OPT2 ENTER CTRL X Control Method
CCN ENTER CCNA X CCN Address
EXV.A
RSET ENTER CRST X Cooling Reset Type

Default: 0
0 = None
DMDC* X Demand Limit Select 1 = Switch
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed
Default: 100%
DM20 XXX % Demand Limit at 20 mA Range: 0 to 100
Loadshed Group Default: 0
SHNM XXX
Number Range: 0 to 99
SHDL XXX% Loadshed Demand Default: 0%
Delta Range: 0 to 60%
Maximum Loadshed Default: 60 min.
SHTM XXX MIN Time Range: 0 to 120 min.
Demand Limit Default: 80%
DLS1 XXX %
Switch 1 Range: 0 to 100%
Demand Limit Default: 50%
DLS2 XXX % Switch 2 Range: 0 to 100%
*Seven items skipped in this example.
90
(32)
80
(27)
70
(21) Maximum Set Point
70 F (21.1 C)
60
(15)
Set Point, F (C)
50
(10)
40
(4.4) FLUD=1 (Water)
Minimum Set Point
40 F (4.4 C)
30
(–1)
20
(–7)
10 FLUD=2 (Medium Temp Brine)

(–12) Minimum Set Point
14 F (–10.0 C)
0
(–17)
0 5 10 15 20 25
mA Signal
EMM — Energy Management Module
Fig. 24 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)
35
Digital Scroll Option If equipped and enabled, the Minimum Load Control valve
The 30MP016-045 units have a factory-installed option for a is active as the last stage of capacity when the unit is unloading.
digital scroll compressor which provides additional stages of un- MAINTENANCE REMINDER — The 30MP ComfortLink
loading for the unit. The digital compressor is always installed in controls have the ability to provide a reminder for service per-
the A1 compressor location. When a digital compressor is in- sonnel that regularly scheduled strainer maintenance is re-
stalled, a digital unloader solenoid (DUS) is used on the digital quired. Maintenance interval is a field-configurable item. The
compressor. Digital Scroll Option not available for units service interval should be adjusted for the job site conditions.
controlled by Multi-Chiller Controller Accessory panel. See Table 33.
DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll oper- Table 33 — Configuring Maintenance Reminder
ates in two stages — the “loaded state” when the solenoid
valve is de-energized and the “unloaded state” when the sole- RUN STATUSPMSTRN
noid valve is energized. During the loaded state, the compres- ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
sor operates like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and Range: 0 to 65,500 hrs
mass flow. SI.ST Strainer Srvc Interval Default: 8760 hrs
Setting SI.ST to 0 disables
However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity the feature
and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the
system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates PRE-START-UP
in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If
the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,
operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 sec- complete Start-Up Checklist for 30MP Liquid Chiller at
onds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33% end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-8). The checklist
of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of
loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from unit condition, application requirements, system informa-
the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of tion, and operation at initial start-up.
capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed.
As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state, Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks
the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the com- have been completed.
pressor sound will change.
The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates opera- System Check
tion of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to maintain 1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid
temperature control. When a digital compressor is installed, an pumps, air-handling equipment, condenser pump or
additional discharge gas temperature thermistor (DTT) is in- other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid.
stalled along with the AUX board for control of the DUS. Consult manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that any
DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a pump interlock contacts have been properly installed.
digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all
(ConfigurationUNITA1.TY) is configured to YES. are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit
There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (Config- wiring diagrams.
urationUNITMAX.T) that is set to 10 seconds (sizes 2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling
020,030) or 7 seconds (sizes 040,045), which indicates the Set Point.
maximum unloading for the digital compressor is 47%. This is 3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-
done to optimize efficiency of the system. mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid
MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL — Minimum load control is to be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the
generally not recommended for split systems. If installed, the system. If chilled water is to be maintained at a tem-
feature must be enabled in the controls. Minimum load control perature below 40°F (4.4°C), a brine of sufficient con-
or hot gas bypass cannot be used in conjunction with the digital centration must be used to prevent freeze-up at antici-
scroll option. pated suction temperatures. To ensure sufficient loop
Minimum load control can only be added to standard com- volume, see Tables 34 and 35.
pressor units in the field. This feature will not operate with an 4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.
optional digital compressor and when the digital function is en- 5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glass(es).
abled (ConfigurationUnitA1.TY=YES). To enable the See Fig. 25. An acceptable oil level in the compressors
minimum load valve, confirm that the digital compressor op- is from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass when the compressors
tion is disabled and set Minimum Load Valve Select to YES, are off. Adjust the oil level as required. See Oil Charge
(ConfigurationOPT1MLV.S=YES). See Table 32. section on page 53 for Carrier approved oils.
NOTE: Minimum Load Control and Digital Compressor oper- 6. Crankcase heaters must be firmly attached to compres-
ation cannot be used together. sors, and must be on for 24 hours prior to start-up
Table 32 — Configuring Minimum Load Control (30MPA020-045, 30MPA,MPW050-071 only).
CONFIGURATIONUNIT
ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS
Range: NO/YES
Default: Depends on prod-
Compressor A1
A1.TY Digital? uct configuration
NO = Not Equipped
Value must be set to NO
CONFIGURATIONOPT1
Range: NO/YES
MLV.S Minimum Load Vlv Default: NO
Select
Set to YES to activate
36
Table 34 — Minimum Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume — English
FLOW RATE PROCESS COOLING OR LOW AMBIENT
NORMAL AIR CONDITIONING APPLICATION OPERATION APPLICATION
UNIT SIZE EVAPORATOR CONDENSER Gal./Ton
Gal./Ton
Gal./Min Gal./Min Std Unit HGBP Digital Std Unit HGBP Digital
30MP016 22 22 12 2 N/A 12 3.4 N/A
30MP020 28 28 6 4 3 10 10 6
30MP030 43 43 6 4 3 10 10 6
30MP032 43 43 6 4 3 10 10 6
30MP040 55 55 3 3 3 6 6 6
30MP045 64 64 3 3 3 6 6 6
30MP050 70 70 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A
30MP055 77 77 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A
30MP060 84 84 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A
30MP065 91 91 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A
30MP071 104 104 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A
LEGEND
HGBP — Hot Gas Bypass
Table 35 — Minimum Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume — SI

FLOW RATE PROCESS COOLING OR LOW AMBIENT
NORMAL AIR CONDITIONING APPLICATION
OPERATION APPLICATION
UNIT SIZE EVAPORATOR CONDENSER L per kW
L per kW
L/s L/s Std Unit HGBP Digital Std Unit HGBP Digital
30MP016 1.4 1.4 13.0 8.6 N/A 13.0 13.0 N/A
30MP020 1.8 1.8 6.5 4.3 3.3 10.8 10.8 6.5
30MP030 2.7 2.7 6.5 4.3 3.3 10.8 10.8 6.5
30MP032 2.7 2.7 6.5 4.3 3.3 10.8 10.8 6.5
30MP040 3.5 3.5 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.5 6.5 6.5
30MP045 4.0 4.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.5 6.5 6.5
30MP050 4.5 4.5 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A
30MP055 4.9 4.9 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A
30MP060 5.3 5.3 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A
30MP065 5.8 5.8 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A
30MP071 6.6 6.6 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A
LEGEND
HGBP — Hot Gas Bypass
7. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate. START-UP AND OPERATION
8. Check rotation of scroll compressors. Monitor control
alarms during first compressor start-up for reverse rota- IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,
tion protection alarm. review Start-Up Checklist at the back of this publication.
The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit and provides
a record of unit condition, application requirements, system
information, and operation at initial start-up.
CAUTION
Crankcase heaters are wired into the control circuit, so they
are always operable as long as the main power supply dis-
connect is on (closed), even if any safety device is open.
Compressor heaters must be on for 24 hours prior to the
start-up of any compressor. Equipment damage could result
if heaters are not energized for at least 24 hours prior to
compressor start-up.
Compressor crankcase heaters must be on for 24 hours be-
fore start-up. To energize the crankcase heaters, close the field
disconnect. Leave the compressor circuit breakers off/open.
The crankcase heaters are now energized.
OIL SIGHTGLASS NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-8.
Fig. 25 — Sight Glass Location PRELIMINARY CHARGE (30MPA) — Refer to GTAC II
(General Training Air Conditioning), Module 5, Charging, Re-
covery, Recycling and Reclamation for charging procedures.
37
The 30MPA units (condenserless) are shipped with a nitrogen 1. Be sure all service valves are open (30MPA units only).
holding charge only. Leak check the 30MPA unit, discharge and 2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set
liquid lines, and the condenser. Be sure the liquid line service point (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range ad-
valve is open. After leak check is completed, system must be justment is necessary.
evacuated and dehydrated. Following the evacuation, the system
must be fully charged. 3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler pump
control).
The liquid charging method is recommended for complete
charging or when additional charge is required. 4. Start condenser fluid pump (if not configured for condenser
pump control (30MPW only).
Using the liquid charging method and charging by weight pro-
cedure, charge the circuit with the amount of Puron refrigerant (R- 5. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch to EN-
410A) with the sum of the operating charge listed in Table 36 for ABLE position.
the base unit, the liquid line charge and the operating charge of the 6. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func-
condenser as the preliminary charge. tioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature
agrees with leaving set point (Set PointsCOOL CSP.1)
Table 36 — Preliminary Puron Refrigerant (R-410A) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2), or if reset is used, with
Charge, lb (kg) the control point (Run StatusVIEW CTPT).
OPERATING CHARGE AMOUNT 7. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see
UNIT SIZE
LB (kg) that it remains well above 32°F (0°C), or the brine freezing
30MPA020 12.0 (5.4) point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.
30MPA030 12.5 (5.6) 8. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section on
30MPA040 14.7 (6.6) page 53).
30MPA045 18.9 (8.5)
30MPA050 29.7 (13.4)
Check Refrigerant Charge
30MPA055 30.7 (13.8) All 30MPW units are shipped with a complete operating
30MPA060 33.1 (14.9)
charge of R-410A and should be under sufficient pressure to con-
duct a leak test after installation. If there is no system pressure, ad-
30MPA065 34.0 (15.3)
mit nitrogen until a pressure is observed and then proceed to test
30MPA071 39.0 (17.6)
for leaks. After leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.
NOTE: For liquid line piping, use the following information: All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.
• ½ in. (12.7 mm) liquid line - 0.6 lb per 10 linear feet Schrader connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refrigerant
(0.27 kg per 3 m) charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If complete
• 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) liquid line - 1.0 lb per 10 linear feet charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for the circuit
(0.45 kg per 3 m) as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is required, op-
• 7/8 in. (22.2 mm) liquid line - 2.0 lb per 10 linear feet erate circuit at full load and add charge to reach 9 to 12°F (–12.8 to
(0.91 kg per 3 m) –11.1°C) subcooling entering the expansion valve. See Step 6b on
• 1 1/8 in. (28.6 mm) liquid line - 3.5 lb per 10 linear feet page 39.
(1.59 kg per 3 m) The liquid charging method is recommended for complete
• 1 3/8 in. (34.9 mm) liquid line - 5.1 lb per 10 linear feet charging or when additional charge is required.
(2.32 kg per 3 m)
NOTE: On units with digital scroll option do not check refriger-
CAUTION ant; charge if compressor is operating at less than 100% capacity;
digital operation can be disabled by configuring A1.TY = NO
Never charge liquid into the low pressure side of the system. (ConfigurationUnitA1.TY).
Do not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge
pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power con- CAUTION
sumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be sure
cooler water is continuously circulating through the cooler to Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do not
prevent freezing. overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure,
While the unit is running at full capacity, add refrigerant until possible compressor damage, and higher power consumption.
the sight glass is clear. The required refrigerant is R-410A. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be sure water is
continuously circulating through the cooler and condenser
With the unit operating at full load, check liquid line sight glass (30MPW) to prevent freezing.
to be sure the unit is fully charged (bubbles in the sight glass indi-
cate the unit is not fully charged).
CAUTION
IMPORTANT: For proper charging, units equipped with a
digital compressor must have the digital compressor operation Be careful not to overcharge the system. Overcharging results
disabled to maintain stable operation. To disable digital com- in higher discharge pressure, possible compressor damage,
pressor operation, set ConfigurationUNITA1.TY (Com- and higher power consumption.
pressor A1 Digital?) to NO. Be sure to re-enable the digital
operation after charging operation is complete. EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION — The 30MP016-045
systems use polyol ester (POE) oil, and 30MP050-071 systems
Follow approved evacuation procedures when removing refrig- use polyvinyl ester (PVE) oil. Because either type of oil can ab-
eration. Release remaining pressure to an approved evacuated cyl- sorb moisture, it is important to minimize the amount of time that
the system interior is left exposed to the atmosphere. Minimizing
inder.
the exposure time of the oil to the atmosphere will minimize the
Actual Start-Up amount of moisture that needs to be removed during evacuation.
Actual start-up should be done only under supervision of a Once all of the piping connections are complete, leak test the
qualified refrigeration mechanic. unit and then pull a deep dehydration vacuum. Connect the vacu-
um pump to the high flow Schrader valve in the suction line and
38
liquid line. For best results, it is recommended that a vacuum of at 5. a. The 30MPA condenserless units are shipped with a
least 500 microns (0.5 mm Hg) be obtained. Afterwards, to ensure nitrogen holding charge. After installation with the
that no moisture is present in the system, perform a standing vacu- field-supplied system high side, the complete sys-
um-rise test. tem should be evacuated and charged per the con-
With the unit in deep vacuum (500 microns or less), isolate denser manufacturer’s charging procedure or charged
the vacuum pump from the system. Observe the rate-of-rise of until the sight glass is clear (with the unit running at
the vacuum in the system. If the vacuum rises by more than 50 full capacity). To achieve maximum system capacity,
microns in a 30-minute time period, then continue the dehydra- add additional charge equal to the difference
tion process. Maintain a vacuum on the system until the stand- between the condenser optimal charge and the con-
ing vacuum requirement is met. This will ensure a dry system. denser minimum charge, which can be obtained from
the charge data provided in the condenser installation
By following these evacuation and dehydration procedures, instructions.
the amount of moisture present in the system will be
minimized. It is required that liquid line filter driers be in- b. To ensure maximum performance of 30MPW units,
stalled between the condenser(s) and the expansion devices to raise the compressor saturated discharge temperature
capture any foreign debris and provide additional moisture re- (SDT) to approximately 100°F (37.8°C) by throttling
moval capacity. the condenser water intake. Add charge until there is
approximately 9 to 12°F (5.0 to 6.6°C) of system
LIQUID CHARGING METHOD subcooling (SDT minus actual temperature entering
For 30MP016-045: Add charge to the unit through the liquid line the expansion valve).
service valve. Never charge liquid into the low-pressure side of
the system. Check Compressor Oil Level
For 30MP050-071: Add the charge to the unit through the high After adjusting the refrigerant charge, allow each circuit to run
flow Schrader valve on the filter drier. fully loaded for 20 minutes. Stop the compressors and check the
oil level. Oil level should be 1/8 to 3/8 up on the sight glass.
1. Close liquid line ball valve (30MPA only).
2. Connect a refrigerant cylinder loosely to the high flow IMPORTANT: Oil level should only be checked when the
Schrader valve connection on the liquid line. Purge the compressors are off.
charging hose and tighten the connections.
3. Open the refrigerant cylinder valve. Add oil only if necessary to bring the oil into view in the sight
4. If the system has been dehydrated and is under vacuum, glass. If oil is added, run the circuit for an additional 10 minutes,
break the vacuum with refrigerant gas. For R-410A, build up then stop and check oil level. If the level remains low, check the
system pressure to 101 psig and 32°F (697 kPa and 0°C). In- piping system for proper design for oil return; also, check the sys-
vert the refrigerant cylinder so that the liquid refrigerant will tem for leaks. If checking the oil level with unit running in part
be charged. load, let unit run one hour, then run at full load for 10 minutes. If
a. For complete charge of 30MPW units, follow oil does not return to acceptable sight glass levels, check for cor-
charging by weight procedure. When charge is nearly rect suction piping and line sizing.
full, complete the process by observing the sight glass Adjust Oil Charge
for clear liquid flow while the unit is operating. The
use of sight glass charging is valid only when unit is Although the compressors are factory charged with oil, additional
oil is likely required to maintain the oil level in the compressor.
operating at full capacity.
Tables 37 and 38 indicate the likely amount required based on the
b. For complete charge of 30MPA units or where refrig- liquid line size and system piping length. Additional lubricant
erant cylinder cannot be weighed, follow the con- estimate is based on using recommended pipe sizes. Values listed
denser manufacturer’s charging procedure or follow are estimates only. See Add Oil section on page 54 for Carrier-
charging by sight glass procedure. The use of sight approved oils. After operating the compressor for a period of time,
glass charging is valid only when unit is operating at the oil level should be between 1/8 and 3/8 of the oil sight glass.
full capacity. The compressor oil level should be checked with the compressor
off to avoid the sump turbulence when the compressor is running.
Oil must be added if the oil level does not meet the requirements.
39
Table 37 — 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (English)
CONDENSER ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (FLUID OUNCES) REQUIRED FOR PIPING AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE
09DP Up to 25 ft 25 to 50 ft 50 to 75 ft 75 to 100 ft 100 to 125 ft 125 to 150 ft 150 to 175 ft 175 to 200 ft
30MPA020 S020 11 12 13 14 21 23 26 28
30MPA030 S030 13 15 17 20 22 24 27 29
30MPA040 M040 27 30 33 36 51 57 63 68
30MPA045 M050 27 30 33 37 52 57 63 69
30MPA050 M050 27 30 34 38 53 59 65 71
30MPA055 M055 27 31 35 39 53 59 65 71
30MPA060 M060 28 32 36 40 54 60 66 72
30MPA065 M065 33 37 41 45 59 65 71 77
30MPA071 M075 39 43 47 51 65 71 77 83
Table 38 — 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (SI)

CONDENSER ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (ML) REQUIRED FOR PIPING AND REFRIGERANT
UNIT SIZE
09DP Up to 7.5 m 7.5 to 15 m 15 to 22.5 m 22.5 to 30 m 30 to 37.5 m 37.5 to 45 m 45 to 52.5 m 52.5 to 60 m
30MPA020 S020 315 347 380 413 620 688 756 823
30MPA030 S030 372 440 508 575 643 710 778 846
30MPA040 M040 784 881 977 1074 1511 1676 1841 2005
30MPA045 M050 791 888 984 1081 1518 1683 1848 2012
30MPA050 M050 783 898 1014 1129 1546 1722 1897 2073
30MPA055 M055 795 911 1026 1141 1558 1734 1910 2085
30MPA060 M060 825 941 1056 1171 1588 1764 1939 2115
30MPA065 M065 976 1091 1206 1322 1739 1914 2090 2266
30MPA071 M075 1147 1263 1378 1493 1910 2086 2261 2437
Operating Limitations Table 39 — Temperature Limits for

TEMPERATURES — See Table 39 for 30MP standard Standard 30MP Units
temperature limits. The 30MPW050-071 and 30MPA050- 30MPA,
071 units use different compressors that require different 30MPW020, STANDARD
operating envelopes. The 30MPW050-071 units (standard 030-045,
30MPW050-
30MPW050-
30MPW016,
032
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
condensing) use water-cooled optimized compressors, 071 HIGH
071
which operate at lower condensing temperatures. The CONDENSING
30MPA050-071 units and 30MPW050-071 heat reclaim F C F C F C
units use air-cooled optimized compressors, which allow Maximum Condenser LWT 140 60 120 49 104 40
for higher condensing temperatures. Minimum Condenser EWT* 65 18 65 18 65 18
Due to the 15/hp per refrigerant circuit requirement, Maximum Cooler EWT† 75 23 75 23 75 23
30MPW 016 and 032 have a limited operating envelope. Maximum Cooler LWT 60 15 60 15 60 15
Minimum Cooler LWT** 40 4 40 4 40 4
CAUTION LEGEND
EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature
Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid) LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature
temperature (LCWT) below 32°F (0°C) for standard units * Operation below 65°F requires the head pressure control option.
with proper brine solution, 40°F (4.4°C) for the standard † For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85°F (29.4°C).
units with fresh water, or below 15°F (–9.4°C) for units ** Unit requires modification below this temperature.
factory built for medium temperature brine, or unit damage
may occur.
IMPORTANT: Medium temperature brine duty application
High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures (below 32°F [0°C] LCWT) for chiller normally requires
(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler the LCWT should not factory modification. Contact your Carrier representative
be above approximately 60°F (16°C). for applicable LCWT range for standard water-cooled
Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units with fresh water, chiller in a specific application.
the LCWT must be no lower than 40°F (4.4°C). For standard
units with a proper brine solution, the LCWT must be no lower
than 32°F (0°C). If the unit is the factory-installed optional
medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can go
down to 15°F (–9.4°C).
40
VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS Installation and Operation section below for actuator installa-
Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable sup- tion and operation details. See Fig. 26 for evaporator isolation
ply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions. relay power and actuator wiring and Fig. 27 for evaporator iso-
lation relay control wiring.
Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor
where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%. To
determine percent voltage imbalance:
max voltage deviation
from avg voltage
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
average voltage
The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between
a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3
legs.
Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60. LEGEND
AB = 243 v EISOR — Evaporator Isolation Relay
FB — Fuse Block
BC = 236 v FU — Fuse
AC = 238 v MTR — Actuator Motor
Fig. 26 — Evaporator Isolation Relay Power and

1. Determine average voltage: Actuator Wiring
243 + 236 + 238

Average voltage =
3
717
=
3
= 239
2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage: LEGEND
(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v EISOR — Evaporator Isolation Relay
(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v
(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v Fig. 27 — Evaporator Isolation Relay Control Wiring
Maximum deviation is 4 v. For troubleshooting the evaporator isolation actuator, simply
3. Determine percent voltage imbalance: change the unit state from Enable to Disable. The water valve
should be open when the unit is in the enable state, and closed
4 when the unit is in the disable state (see Operation of Machine
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x Based on Control Method section on page 21).
239
= 1.7%
Head Pressure Control (30MPW Only)
The 30MPW units have a factory-installed option for head
This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maxi- pressure control which will modulate condenser water flow to
mum allowable of 2%. maintain a target saturated condensing temperature. The factory-
installed head pressure control option includes an AUX board
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is (Fig. 27) installed in the control panel and a reverse acting actua-
more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company tor and water valve installed on the leaving condenser water pip-
immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition ing between the condenser and the 6-in. water manifold. The
is corrected. AUX board provides a 2 to 10VDC signal to the actuator. The
water valve is controlled based on each circuit’s saturated con-
densing temperature and compressor status. 30MPW units oper-
Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is sup- ating at less than 65°F condenser entering water temperature re-
plied from the main incoming power through a factory-in- quire the use of head pressure control.
stalled control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.
Field wiring connections are made to the LVT. The control scheme monitors the saturated condensing tem-
perature and uses a PI (proportional integral) loop to control the
Evaporator Isolation (All Units) head pressure. Proportional and integral gain parameters for the
All 30MP units have a factory-installed option for evapora- water-cooled controls are adjustable and can be found through the
tor isolation. This option consists of a reverse acting electronic scrolling marquee, ConfigurationC.VLV.
actuator installed on the evaporator leaving water valve and an For 30MPW 032 units, the head pressure control algorithm will
additional normally closed control relay in the control panel. compare the saturated condensing temperature (SCT) from each
The relay coil is connected across the LVT terminal 24 and circuit and control to whichever is lower. The circuit switch dead-
TB3 terminal 1 in the 30MP control panel. The actuator is con- band, ConfigurationC.VLVSW.DB, determines when the
nected across normally closed contacts 2 and 1 on the relay. control function switches from controlling the saturated condens-
The valve is controlled based on the unit state, whether enabled ing temperature in one refrigerant circuit to controlling the SCT in
or disabled (see Operation of Machine Based on Control Meth- the other refrigerant circuit. For instance, if both circuits are run-
od section on page 21). When the unit is disabled, the water ning, the SCT in circuit B will have to be lower by the SW.DB val-
valve will close. When the unit is enabled, the water valve will ue before switching from controlling the circuit A SCT. The
open. This option is recommended for units operating under SW.DB point is only used on 30MPW 032 units that are configured
supervision of the 30MP Multi-Unit Controller. See Actuator
41
for condenser water valve head pressure control, Configura- reverse acting, spring return, normally open. The red and black
tionC.VLVHPCT=ENBL. wires are used to power the actuator. The signal connection is
made at the actuator white wire. The orange and pink wires are
Actuator Installation and Operation not used. The default settings on the actuator are normally open
and fail open. The actuator must be installed with CCW facing
up; see Fig. 30. This will ensure that if the actuator were to fail,
WARNING the water valve would open fully. The dial setting Y=0 should be
set to counterclockwise to ensure the normal position of the actu-
Before performing service or maintenance operations on ator and valve is fully open. Ensure the water valve is in the fully
unit, turn off main power switch to unit. Electrical shock open position prior to tightening.
could cause personal injury.
30MP016-045 EVAPORATOR ISOLATION — The actuator is
See Table 40 and Fig. 28 for actuator details. Refer to the a two-wire actuator with On/Off control, reverse acting, spring re-
following sections for the specific settings of each actuator pri- turn. When no power is applied to the actuator the water valve will
or to installation. The fail position of the actuator is defined as be open. When 24V is applied to the actuator, the water valve will
the position when there is no power to the actuator. The normal close. The actuator must be installed with CCW facing up; see
position of the actuator is defined as the position when the ac- Fig. 30. The dial setting Y=0 should be set to counterclockwise to
tuator is powered and no signal applied. All actuators use 24V ensure the actuator is reverse acting.
power. The signal for all head pressure control actuators is 2- 30MP050-071 HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL AND EVAPO-
10V. Every actuator mounting bracket has a 10-32 bolt in- RATOR ISOLATION — All actuators are 5-wire, 2-10VDC
stalled. The actuator must attach to this bolt to operate correct- control, reverse acting, electronic fail-safe. The actuator is pre-
ly. See Fig. 28. programmed for the unit and should not require field program-
Actuator Removal, 30MP016-030, 040-071 ming. The red and black wires are used to power the actuator. The
signal connection is made at the actuator white wire. The orange
Each actuator is positioned horizontally. Find the wire splice and pink wires are not used. The default settings on the actuator
which connects the actuator wires to the control box wires. For are normally open and fail open. The normal position dial should
head pressure control, the splice is located 24 in. of wire length be set to 0 (Fig. 31), which will ensure the actuator will move to
from the control box. For evaporator isolation, the splice is located the full counterclockwise position. The fail-safe position dial
in the terminal box mounted on the chassis next to the compressor should be set to counterclockwise. The actuator should be in the
sled. Select a location to cut the wires, ensuring there is at least ½ fully counterclockwise position prior to installation. If necessary,
in. of length to strip back the wires to connect to the new actuator. press and hold the manual override button while turning the actua-
Remove the actuator by loosening the 10 mm nuts on the actuator tor to the full counterclockwise position prior to installing the ac-
stem clamp. Lift the actuator off the stem and the bracket. tuator on the water valve.
Actuator Removal, 30MP032 Manual Override
Find the wire splice which connects the actuator wires to the Each actuator can be manually positioned as necessary for ac-
control box wires. For head pressure control, the splice is located tuator installation, troubleshooting, or unit service.
24 in. of wire length from the control box. For evaporator isola-
tion, the splice is located in the terminal box mounted on the chas- The manual override will only operate if no power is ap-
sis next to the compressor sled. Select a location to cut the wires, plied to the actuator.
ensuring there is at least ½ in. of length to strip back the wires to 30MP016-045 — Each actuator is shipped with a manual crank
connect to the new actuator. Loosen the 10 mm nuts on the actua- from the factory. The manual crank is installed on the actuator. In-
tor stem clamp. Next, using a 1/8 in. hex tool, loosen the valve sert the manual crank in the hexagon hole located on the actuator
stem set screw. The valve stem does not need to be removed. With (Fig. 30). With CCW facing up on the actuator, turn the crank in
the valve stem loose, move the actuator away from the 10-32 the counterclockwise direction. This will open the water valve. To
bracket bolt and lift it off the valve stem. To avoid interference lock the actuator in the required position, flip the lock switch (lo-
with the chassis or piping, the actuator must be lifted off the valve cated to the right of the crank) to the locked position. The manual
stem at approximately 45 degrees. override can be disengaged in two ways: Flip the lock switch to
the unlocked position, or apply 24V power for greater than 3 sec-
Actuator Installation onds to the red and black wires. In either case, the actuator will go
Prior to installing the new actuator, refer to the following sec- to the fully open position (fully counterclockwise).
tions for specific actuator settings for each 30MP unit. The fail po- 30MP050-071 — For isolation during heat exchanger service,
sition and normal position of the actuator must be set to fully open turn the fail-safe position dial fully clockwise (CW, see Fig. 31)
for correct operation. and remove power to the actuator. This will hold the water valve
Replacement actuators are shipped with multiple size uni- in the fully closed position. Do not return power to the actuator un-
versal clamps. The universal clamp is the small V-shaped insert til service is complete. Each actuator includes a manual override
which clamps to the actuator stem. For all 30MP units, the ¾ button. Pressing this button will release the actuator drive gear.
in. size universal clamp should be installed on the actuator. The With the manual override button held down, the water valve shaft
metal bracket installed on the water valve has a 10-32 bolt can be rotated manually. Upon releasing the manual override but-
which is used to hold the actuator in place during operation ton, the actuator will return to the fail-safe position. The manual
Slide the actuator down over the water valve stem. The actua- override is not recommended for heat exchanger isolation, as the
tor should locate on the 10-32 bolt, attached to the bracket. En- manual override does not lock in the actuator in position.
sure the actuator is level with the mounting bracket and per-
pendicular to the shaft. Tighten the 10 mm actuator clamp nuts Actuator Troubleshooting
to 7.5 ft-lbs. Tighten the water valve stem set screw to 60 in.- 30MP050-071 — Each actuator contains a front LED panel to
lb. See Fig. 29. indicate the actuator status. The green light (Power Adaptation)
is on the right, the yellow light (Status) is on the left. See Ta-
Actuator Settings bles 41 and 42.
30MPW016-045 HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL — The actua-
tor is a 5-wire actuator with 2-10VDC control. The actuator is
42
Table 40 — 30MP Valve and Actuator Part Numbers
CARRIER PART NUMBER
30MP VALVE AND ACTUATOR COMBINATION ACTUATOR ONLY WATER VALVE ONLY
UNIT Head Pressure Control
Head Pressure Control Evaporator Isolation Head Pressure Control Evaporator Isolation
or Evaporator Isolation
016
EF04ZZ422 EF04ZZ421 EC28ZZ421
020
030
HF680034 HF680035
032
EF04ZZ482 EF04ZZ481 EC28ZZ481
040
045
050
055
060 EF04ZZ541 HF680036 EC28ZZ541
065
071
All 30MP units use 10 mm nuts

universal clamp 7.5 ft-lb
marked ¾ in.
10-32 bolt attached

to metal bracket Fig. 29 — Universal Clamp Size and Nut Torque for
All 30MP Units
Fig. 28 — Actuator Bracket 10-32 Bolt Location
43
Install actuator with
CCW facing up.
Normal position
dial set to For normal operation,
counterclockwise set to unlock (left).
(left). For manual override: set
to lock (right) to hold
For manual override: Insert actuator at current
manual crank here. Rotate position. Power cannot
counterclockwise to desired be applied during
actuator position. Power cannot manual override.
be applied during manual
override.
Bracket 10-32 bolt located here

(bottom of actuator). See Fig. 28.
Fig. 30 — Actuator Settings, 30MP016-045 Head Pressure Control and Evaporator Isolation
Normal position.
Set to 0.
Fail-safe position.
Manual override
Set to CCW.
button
Status lights.
Left - yellow
Right - green
Bracket 10-32 bolt

located here (bottom of
actuator)
Fig. 31 — Actuator Settings, 30MP050-071 Head Pressure Control and Evaporator Isolation
44
Table 41 — 30MP Indicator Lights*
30MP050-071 ACTUATOR LED STATUS INDICATOR LIGHTS SEQUENCE
YELLOW LIGHT STATUS GREEN LIGHT STATUS ACTUATOR STATUS
Off On Operation ok, no faults
Off Blinking Fail-safe mechanism is active
On Off Fault is detected
Off Off Not in operation/capacitors charging
On On Adaptation running
Blinking On Communication with programming tool
*See Fig. 31 for location of indicator lights.
Table 42 —Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
Signal applied to actuator, no Blown actuator Fuse 9 or Fuse Replace fuse, inspect wiring for short or overloaded circuit.
response 10 in control panel
Low supply voltage Minimum actuator voltage 21.6 VDC
Input voltage out of range Check input voltage with a digital volt meter. Input signal must be above 2 VDC to
have the actuator move.
The torque load has exceeded Inspect actuator and water valve for debris or interference:
the actuator’s torque. An
object or circumstance is pre- • fluid flow outside unit limits
venting the motion of the actu- • improper actuator installation
ator or water valve. • actuator damage
• dirt and debris build-up
Actuator operation is reversed Incorrect actuator switch Turn normal position switch to correct setting; see Fig. 30 and 31.
settings Switch must be turned all the way to the proper setting.
Actuator does not drive toward Actuator input voltage polarity Actuator Control Box Actuator Wire Polarity
target position incorrect Terminal Color
Head Pressure Fuse 10 Red (+)
Control
AUX J4-2 Blk (-)
AUX J4-1 Wht (+)
Evap Isolation Evap Iso Relay, 2 Wht (+)
Evap Iso Relay, 1 Red (050-071 only) (+)
TB3-2 Blk (-)
Head Pressure Control Configuration and Oper- condensing temperature which the unit control algorithm will
ation use to modulate the condenser leaving water valve. The default
value for H.DP is 75°F (23.9°C). See Table 44.
The Head Pressure Control option must be enabled in the
unit software, ConfigurationC.VLVHPCT=ENBL. With ADJUSTING PI ROUTINES — The 30MPW head pressure
this option enabled, an AUX board and condenser fluid control routines use PI (proportional integral) loops to maintain
thermistors are installed and enabled from the factory. The a user-configurable head pressure set point. Gain default values
30MPW control loop utilizes three sets of gains depending on can be adjusted through the scrolling marquee, Configura-
the stage of capacity and the condenser entering water tem- tionC.VLV (items H.PGM, H.TCM, H.PGH, H.TCH,
perature. The entering condenser gain schedule temperature H.PGL, H.TCL). The default gain values, shown below,
(H.CWL) is the minimum temperature at which gain schedul- should provide steady operation under most operating condi-
ing will be used. If the condenser entering water temperature tions. However, in some instances, these values may need to be
is above this value, the control loop will use the high gains adjusted. If the control routine is not responding fast enough to
(H.PGH, H.TCH) regardless of capacity. Condenser water large changes (circuit starting, for example), increase the pro-
thermistors are required when Head Pressure Control is en- portional term.
abled (ConfigurationC.VLVHPCT=ENBL) and will be When the routine is making too great a change to valve po-
installed from the factory. For optimum control, the condens- sition, decrease the proportional term. To minimize hunting,
er fluid thermistors should be installed and enabled in the keep the integral time constant as high as possible.
software (ConfigurationOPT1CDWS). If the condenser For operating conditions where the saturated condensing
water thermistors are not installed, the unit will use the de- temperature setpoint (HSP) is configured above 85°F it is rec-
fault gains under all conditions. See Table 43. ommended to change the control gains.
SATURATED CONDENSING TEMPERATURE SET-
POINT — The target saturated condensing temperature is ad-
justable, SetpointsHEADH.DP. This is the target saturated
45
Table 43 — Items Available in the COND VALVE CONFIGURATION Sub-mode
ConfigurationC.VLV
POINT NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS RANGE DEFAULT RECOMMENDED GAINS
FOR HSP>85F
CNIS Cond water isolation DSBL/ENBL DSBL
HPCT Head Pressure Control Configuration DSBL/ENBL DSBL
CDMX Maximum allowable valve position during operation % 1 - 100 100
CDMN Minimum allowable valve position during operation % 0 - 99 7

Valve position when CNIS is enabled, unit is enabled
CDCL and zero at capacity % 0 - 100 10
Valve position for approx. 10 seconds after first stage % 0 - 100 70

CDVP of capacity
H.PGM P gain at capacity 40% to 62% 0 - 10 1 0.7
H.TCM Integral time constant at capacity 40% to 62% 1 – 200 70 70
H.PGH P gain at capacity 62% to 100% 0 - 10 1.8 0.7
H.TCH Integral time constant at capacity 62% to 100% 1 – 200 70 70
H.PGL P gain at capacity below 40% 0 - 10 0.7 0.7
H.TCL Integral time constant at capacity below 40% 1 – 200 70 70

50 – 130 65
H.CWL Entering condenser gain schedule temperature °F
(10 – 54.4°C) (18.3°C)
H.AWD Head pressure anti-windup factor 0 - 10 0.7

0 – 10 2
SW.DB HP ckt switch deadband (two ckt only) ?F (0 – 5.6°C) (1.1°C)
Table 44 — Items Available in the SETPOINTS Mode

SetpointsHEADH.DP
POINT NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS RANGE DEFAULT
70 – 130
H.DP sat. condensing temp setpoint °F (21.1 – 57.2°C) 75
Condenser Water Isolation When condenser isolation is enabled, the valve will go to
Any unit configured for Head Pressure Control is also ca- the CDCL position when the unit is enabled and at zero capaci-
pable of Condenser Water Isolation. By default, this option is ty. Under certain start-up conditions, such as high condenser
disabled; however, it can be enabled at Configuration entering water temperature or high evaporator entering water
C.VLVCNIS=ENBL. When this option is enabled, the unit temperature, the CDCL position may need to be raised to avoid
is allowed to operate (see Operation of Machine Based on A126 and A127 (high condensing temperature) alarms.
Control Method section on page 21) and at zero capacity, the Under some operating conditions, the scroll compressors
condenser water valve will position itself to the configurable may become noisy. Generally this condition will exist when
CDCL point, ConfigurationC.VLVCDCL. The default there is a low pressure differential across the scroll compressor.
configuration for CNIS is disabled. When CNIS is disabled The noise may be noticeable during start-up, before the con-
the condenser water valve will fully open anytime the unit is denser water valve has reached its target condition and the satu-
at zero capacity. Condenser water isolation will operate when rated condensing temperature has increased. This temporary
enabled, independent of the Head Pressure Control configura- noisy condition is normal and does not indicate a problem with
tion (enabled or disabled). the compressor.
Important Notes about Head Pressure Control For troubleshooting, the condenser water valve position can
be set in Service Test mode through the scrolling marquee. See
Because this option restricts condenser water flow, it is not Table 45.
recommended to install a condenser flow switch on any unit
The head pressure control water valve position can also be
with head pressure control. forced in Service Test mode.
Table 45 — Items Available in the SERVICE TEST Mode

Service TestOUTSCDV.T
POINT NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS RANGE
CDV.T Cond Water Valve % Open % 0 to 100
46
OPERATION SEQUENCE Electronic Components
The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced elec-
CONTROL switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTROL po- tronic control system that normally does not require service. For
sition. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from the in- details on controls refer to Controls section on page 7.
ternal control or CCN network command or remote control clo- Access to the controls is through a hinged panel. Inner panels
sure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leaving fluid are secured in place and should not be removed unless all power to
set point. The first compressor starts 11/2 to 3 minutes after the call the chiller is off.
for cooling.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) (30MP050-071
For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit controls Only)
to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load reduces.
If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be unable to See Fig. 32 for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liq-
maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature because of im- uid refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes
posed power limitations. through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-
phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion
SERVICE valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a
stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless power
pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for ro-
WARNING tation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase rela-
tionship of the power pulses.
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off
all power to this equipment during service. There may be As the stepper motor rotates, its motion is transferred to linear
more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations movement by a lead screw. Refrigerant flow is modulated by ei-
to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. ther opening or closing the port. The valve includes a positive
shut-off when closed.
Service Test
Both main power and control circuit power must be on.
The Service Test function should be used to verify proper opera-
tion of condenser output, compressors, minimum load valve sole-
noid (if installed), cooler pump, EXV, and remote alarm relay. To
use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch
must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to enter the mode
and display TEST. Press ENTER twice so that OFF flashes. Enter
the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST
value to the ON position and press ENTER . Move the Enable/Off/
Remote Control switch to enable. Press ESCAPE and the
button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode. ENABLE/OFF/
REMOTE switchmust be set to ENABLE to operate test.
NOTE: Cooler and condenser (30MPW) water flow must be
established in order to operate compressor in service test. 1.
2.
Cable
Glass Seal
Test the condenser output, cooler pump, liquid line solenoid 3.
4.
Motor Housing
Stepper Motor
valve (30MPA only), crankcase heater, water valve (accessory), 5. Bearing
and alarm relay by changing the item values from OFF to ON. 6. Lead Screw
These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad ac- 7.
8.
Insert
Valve Piston
tivity for 10 minutes. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but 9. Valve Seat
the control will limit the rate by staging one compressor per min- 10. Valve Port
ute. Minimum load valve can be tested with the compressors on or
off. The relays under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes Fig. 32 — Cutaway View of the Electronic
if there is no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they Expansion Valve (Sizes 050-071)
are turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain
enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running.
All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compres- Table 46 shows the number of steps for the EXV. The EXV
sor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other mode or sub- motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to
mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during the TEST either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to the move, to ensure the
mode. The STAT item (Run StatusVIEW) will display “0” as value is open or closed completely.
long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value Table 46 — EXV Steps
must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to
Enable or Remote control for normal operation. UNIT SIZE 30MP EXV STEPS
050-071 3690
Charging
For 30MPW units, when service is required, recover the refriger- The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a therm-
ant from the system. istor located in a well in the suction manifold before the com-
pressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure
For 30MPA units when service is required, the compressor
transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature. The
and evaporator can be serviced by closing the factory-in- thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated gas en-
stalled liquid line service valve and field-installed discharge tering the compressor and the pressure transducer determines
line service valve. After the valves are closed, recover refrig-
the saturated temperature of suction gas. The difference be-
erant from the system. tween the temperature of the superheated gas and the saturated
suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board controls
47
the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper motor to
maintain superheat set point.
The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approxi-
mately 9°F (5°C). Because EXV status is communicated to the
main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV boards, it is
possible to track the valve position. The unit is then protected
against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to compressor
start, the EXV will open. At low ambient temperatures the EXV is
closed at start up. After initialization period, valve position is
tracked by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of
valve movement.
The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction tempera-
ture to 50°F (10°C). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at
higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compres- Fig. 33 — 30MP050-071 EXV Cable Connections
sor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating to EXV Module
pressure).
If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling CAUTION
circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a number
of checks that can be made using test functions and initialization Do not disconnect EXV connector with power applied to the
features built into the microprocessor control. See the EXV Trou- board. Damage to the board may result if disconnected while
bleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs. under power. DO NOT short meter leads together or connect
EXV Troubleshooting Procedure pin 3 to any other pin as board damage will occur.
Follow steps below to diagnose and correct EXV problems. During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative
Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/Re- test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6). Digital volt-
meters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If
mote Control (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press ENTER on the it remains constant at a voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts,
scrolling marquee until the display is blank or on Navigator™ dis- remove the connector to the valve and recheck.
play until ‘Select a menu item’ appears on the display. Use the ar- Press ENTER and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4-posi-
row keys to select the Service Test mode. Press ENTER . The display tion DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to On). If
will be: a problem still exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is cor-
> TEST OFF rect, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked.
OUTS 1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure they
are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and
COMP EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.
Press ENTER (password entry may be required) and use to 2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin
change OFF to ON. Switch the EOR switch to Enable. The Ser- terminals.
vice Test mode is now enabled. Move the pointer down to the 3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance of
OUTS sub-mode and press ENTER . Move the pointer to item each motor phase. Remove the EXV Board J6 connector.
EXV.A. Press ENTER and the valve position will flash. Use to Check the resistance of the two windings. Resistance be-
tween pins 1 and 2 for one winding or between pins 4 and 5
select 100% valve position (hold for quick movement) and for the other winding should be approximately 52 ± 5.2
press ENTER . ohms. Differences of more than 10% between windings indi-
The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by cate a defective motor. Resistance between any lead and
ground should be infinite or “open.” Any resistance reading
placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve will indicate a shorted winding and the valve will need to be
body to verify that the actuator is moving. A hard knocking should replaced.
be felt from the actuator when it reaches the top of its stroke (can
FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — See Fig. 32 for a
be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). Press ENTER again cutaway view of the EXV. Motor kits for the EXV valve are avail-
twice if necessary to confirm this. To close the valve, press ENTER , able as replacement parts.
select 0% with and press ENTER . The actuator should knock EXV VALVE REPLACEMENT — To replace the valve, per-
when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the form the following procedure:
valve is not working properly, continue with the checkout proce- 1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the circuit.
dure below. 2. Disconnect the EXV cable from the EXV.
Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the 3. The valve may be replaced by cutting the piping. A tubing
EXV Board (see Fig. 33). Do not disconnect EXV connector with cutter must be used to prevent creating contaminants in the
power applied to the board. Damage to the board may result if dis- piping.
connected while under power. Connect positive test lead to EXV- 4. The EXVs have copper connections and any brazing alloy
J6 terminal 3. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the Ser- can be used to install the valve. During installation the torch
vice Test procedure above, move the valve output under test to flame should be directed away from the valve body and ca-
100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or connect pin 3 to any ble. The valve body should be wrapped with a wet cloth
other pin as board damage will occur. during the brazing operation. Be sure to use a nitrogen purge
while brazing the valve in place.
5. Check for refrigerant leaks.
6. Once the valve body has cooled, reconnect the EXV cable.
Care should be taken to ensure engagement of the alignment
key.
48
7. Check the operation of the valve using the EXV Trouble- 5. To install the motor, be sure to use a new gasket.
shooting Procedure on this page. 6. Manually depress the valve piston before installing the
VALVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT motor assembly. This will allow for the lead screw to en-
gage the piston as the motor is installed.
IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before opening
EXV. Do not re-use gaskets. 7. Lightly oil the threads and gasket on the new motor. Care-
fully seat the motor on the valve body. Using a wrench
and back-up wrench as described above, tighten the motor
Perform the following procedure to replace the EXV motor:
assembly as follows: Tighten the motor to 36 ft-lb (50 N-
1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the circuit. m) and then tighten an additional 30 degrees as indicated
2. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will retract in Fig. 34.
the piston fully. 8. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced on
3. Remove power from the EXV board and then disconnect the the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement of the
EXV Cable from the EXV. alignment key. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.
4. Using a wrench and back-up wrench, remove the motor 9. Reapply control power and test the operation using Service
assembly from the EXV body. Be sure to place the back- Test operation listed above.
up wrench on the adapter to remove the motor as shown
in Fig. 34.
DISASSEMBLY
CLOSED
ADAPTER
27mm / 11/16''
OPEN
NOTE: Open valve in Quick Test sub-mode before disassembling.
ASSEMBLY
CLOSED
50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30° 27mm / 11/16''
OPEN
GASKET
a30-5977
EF05BD331 NV 36mm
NOTES:
1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.
2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.
Fig. 34 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor (30MP050-071)
49
Compressor Replacement the side of the unit or above, depending on where clearance
All models contain scroll compressors and have two or space was allowed during unit installation. See Fig. 35.
three compressors. A compressor is most easily removed from
HPS
DPT
RGT
SPT
EWT
(HIDDEN)
CWFS
LWT
Compressor Location — 30MPW045 Shown

LEGEND DPT.A
CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
EWT — Entering Water Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch COMPRESSOR B1
LWT — Leaving Water Thermistor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor (Optional)
COMPRESSOR A1
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
HPS.A
DPT.B SPT.A
HPS.B
SPT.B
CIRCUIT A CONNECTION CWFS
CIRCUIT B CONNECTION
EWT
LWT
Compressor Location — 30MPW032 shown

Fig. 35 — Compressor Location — 30MP016-045 Units
50
WARNING
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off
all power to this equipment during installation and service.
There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all dis-
connect locations to alert others not to restore power until
work is completed.
1. Open and tag all disconnects following proper lock-out tag-
out procedures. Use proper personal protective equipment.
2. Remove the junction box cover and disconnect the com-
pressor power and ground connections. See Fig. 36-38.
3. Disconnect and remove the crankcase heater from the com-
pressor. Save the ground screw for re-installation later.
4. If the compressor is equipped with a motor protection mod-
ule, disconnect the wiring to the device. See Fig. 37 or 38.
Fig. 38 — External Motor Protection Module,

30MP050-071 Units
5. Remove the cable from the compressor junction box.
6. If the compressor is a digital compressor, remove the digital
unloader solenoid (Fig. 39). Save the mounting screw for re-
installation later. Remove the harness from the junction box.
7. Isolate the circuit and remove the refrigerant using standard
refrigeration techniques.
8. If the circuit high pressure switch (HPS), discharge tempera-
ture thermistor (DTT), return gas thermistor (RGT), dis-
charge pressure transducer (DPT), or suction pressure trans-
ducer (SPT) are in an area where brazing could damage the
NOTE: See wire color codes in sensor, remove the device from the line and secure it out of
Crankcase Heater Wiring sec-
SEE
NOTE tion, page 53. the way.
9. For tandem and trio compressor circuits, remove the oil from
a38-7315 the compressors as described in the section Removing Oil on
page 54. This is required to cut (tandem compressor circuits)
Fig. 36 — 30MP020-045 Compressor Junction or remove (trio compressor circuits) the oil equalizer line.
Box without Motor Protection Module For tandem compressor circuits, cut the oil equalizer with a
tubing cutter in a convenient place to be able to reconnect
with a coupling.
10. Remove the bolts securing the compressor. Be sure to save
all of the mounting hardware for compressor installation.
SEE
NOTE
NOTE: 30MP016 units
NOTE: See wire color have internal motor
codes in Crankcase protection.
a38-7316
Heater Wiring section, a38-7317
page 53.
Fig. 37 — 30MP016-045 Compressor Junction

Box with Motor Protection Module
Fig. 39 — Digital Unloader Solenoid Valve
11. Using a tubing cutter, cut the suction and discharge lines
in an area of the manifold that can be reconnected with a
coupling.
51
12. Carefully remove the compressor from the unit. All com- 18. Replace the liquid line filter drier.
pressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use care and ex- 19. If the compressor failure was as a result of a motor burn, in-
treme caution when lifting and moving compressors. stall a suction line filter drier. This device must be removed
after 72 hours.
WARNING 20. Leak check all braze connections and repair if necessary.
21. Evacuate the circuit using proper service techniques.
All compressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use care 22. Knock the same holes out of the new compressor junction
and extreme caution when lifting and moving compressors to box, if required, and install the cable connectors from the old
avoid personal injury and equipment damage. compressor.
13. The replacement compressor will come with an oil charge. If 23. Install the crankcase heater on the compressor as described
the compressor will be mounted in a tandem or trio compres- in the section Crankcase Heater Mounting on page 53 and
sor circuit, the oil must be drained below the connection wire the crankcase heater as described in the same section.
point. Be sure to measure the amount of oil removed and re- Crankcase heater position is critical to proper operation.
place it with new oil once the assembly is complete. In tan- 24. For compressors with the motor protection module, wire
dem compressor applications, while connecting the oil the power wiring and control wiring as shown in Fig. 37
equalizer line, it is recommended that the compressor be and 38. Be sure the correct motor protection module is
tipped back approximately 12 degrees from the horizontal to installed. Copeland replacement compressors can be
move the oil away from the fitting so any remaining oil shipped with one of two motor protection modules, Kri-
moves away from the oil equalizer connection point. wan or CoreSense communication module. Replacement
14. Before moving the compressor into its final location, install compressors shipped with Kriwan motor protection
the mounting grommets on the compressor. modules are shipped with two solid-state motor protec-
15. Carefully move the compressor into place on the unit. All tion modules. A 120/240-volt module is installed and a
compressors must be lifted by the lifting rings. Use care 24-volt module is shipped with the compressor. Re-
and extreme caution when lifting and moving compressors. placement 30MP020-045 compressors with CoreSense
modules are shipped with a voltage specific solid-state
16. Secure the compressor using the mounting hardware re- motor protection module. These units require the 24-volt
moved in Step 10. Tighten mounting hardware to torque val- module be field installed. Failure to install the 24-volt
ues listed in Tables 47 and 48. module will result in a compressor failure alarm. For
17. Using new fittings and tubing, reconnect the suction and dis- compressors without a motor protection module, install
charge lines. In tandem compressor circuits, the oil equalizer the motor plug by hand only. See Fig. 36.
line for the new compressor should be as close to the original
as possible. Make the connections using proper service tech-
niques. In trio compressor circuits, reconnect the oil equaliz- CAUTION
er line. Be sure to use a new O ring to make the connection.
Proper torque values are listed in Tables 47 and 48. The molded electrical plug should be installed by hand to
properly seat the plug on the electrical terminals. To avoid
Table 47 — Unit Torque Specification, damage, the plug should not be struck with a hammer or any
30MP016-045 other device.
FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE 25. If the compressor is a digital compressor, connect the digital
Compressor Sled 7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m) unloader solenoid as shown in Fig. 39.
Mounting Bolts
Compressor Mounting 7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)
Bolts CAUTION
Compressor Power 24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7 to 3.2 N-m)
Connections Do not start the compressor while the system is in a deep vac-
Compressor Ground 14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m) uum. Compressor failure may occur.
Terminal Connection
Trio Compressor 74 to 81 ft-lb (100 to 110 N-m)
26. Recharge the compressors with new oil as described in the
Assembly Oil Equalizer section Add Oil on page 54.
Connection 27. Charge the circuit as described in the Charging section on
Table 48 — Unit Torque Specification, page 47.
30MP050-071 28. Check the operation of the compressor.
FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE
Compressor Mounting 7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)
Bolts
Compressor Power 3.33 to 3.75 ft-lb (4.5 to 5.1 N-m)
Connections
Compressor Ground 3.33 to 3.75 ft-lb (4.5 to 5.1 N-m)
Terminal Connections
52
CRANKCASE HEATER MOUNTING — All 30MPA units 5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and at-
and 30MPW 030-071 units have crankcase heaters as standard tach to the bracket using the four nuts removed in Step 4.
equipment. It is important that the crankcase heater be tight to the For sizes 016 and 020, torque is 7 to 10 ft-lb. For sizes
compressor shell and in proper location. See Fig. 40-42 for proper 030-045, torque is 35 to 50 ft-lb. For sizes 050-071,
locations. torque is 7 to 8 ft-lb.
6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on
0.55-0.95 in. the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver as
[14-24 mm]
the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver. Keep
the temperature below 1472°F (800°C) under normal sol-
dering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the copper solder
of the brazed plate heat exchanger from changing its struc-
Tighten band to 20-25 in.-lb (2.26-2.82 nm) ture. Failure to do so can result in internal or external leak-
age at the connections which cannot be repaired.
Fig. 40 — 30MPA 020 7. For coolers, ensure that the original size tubing is used (1/
Crankcase Heater Location
2 in. for sizes 016 and 020, /8 in. for sizes 030-045, and
5
13/8 in. for sizes 050-071) between the TXV/EXV or ex-
0.51-0.71 in.
[13-18 mm]
pansion device and the cooler. The TXV/EXV or expan-
sion device must be located within 1 ft of the heat ex-
changer, with no bends between the TXV/EXV or expan-
sion device outlet and the cooler inlet.
8. Reconnect the water/brine lines.
Tighten band to 20-25 in.-lb (2.26-2.82 nm)
9. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.
Fig. 41 — 30MPA,W030-045 BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT
Crankcase Heater Location EXCHANGER CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers
must be cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service
skilled in chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5%
phosphoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%
3.23 in.
oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the exchanger,
[82 mm] preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning, rinse with large
amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the acid. Cleaning materi-
als must be disposed of properly.
The strainers in front of the water/brine inlets of the heat ex-
changers should be cleaned periodically, depending on condition
Tighten band to 25-30 in.-lb (2.8-3.4 nm)
of the chiller water/brine.
Fig. 42 — 30MPA,W050-071
Crankcase Heater Location Water Treatment
Untreated or improperly treated water may result in corro-
CRANKCASE HEATER WIRING — Crankcase heaters are sion, scaling, erosion, or algae. The services of a qualified wa-
specific to unit voltage. Each crankcase heater has a color-coded ter treatment specialist should be obtained to develop and mon-
tag to indicate voltage. Table 49 identifies tag color code for each itor a treatment program. See Water System Cleaning section
voltage. See Fig. 36 and 37 for compressor junction box connec- for water quality characteristics and limitations in the unit in-
tion information. stallation instructions.
Table 49 — Crankcase Heater Color-Coded Tags
UNIT POWER SUPPLY TAG COLOR CAUTION
208/230-3-60
380-3-60 Yellow Water must be within design flow limits, clean and treated to
380/415-3-50 ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential
460-3-60 Red of tubing damage due to corrosion, scaling, erosion, and algae.
575-3-60 Blue Carrier assumes no responsibility for chiller or condenser
damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water.
30MP Cooler and 30MPW Condenser
BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT Oil Charge
EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat ex-
changers cannot be repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak CAUTION
(refrigerant or water) develops, the heat exchanger must be
replaced. To replace a brazed plate heat exchanger: The compressor in a Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) system uses
1. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the a polyol ester (POE) oil or poly-vinyl ester (PVE) oil. This is
heat exchanger. extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. Take
2. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as the all necessary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the
original heat exchanger. For the condensers, compare part atmosphere. Failure to do so could result in possible equip-
numbers on the heat exchangers. For the coolers, insulation ment damage.
covers the manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths
of the replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil for
the same. 30MP016-045 units. The 30MP050-071 units use polyvinyl es-
ter (PVE) oil. See Table 50.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the re-
frigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.
4. Remove the four nuts holding the heat exchanger to the
brackets. Save the nuts.
53
Table 50 — Compressor Oils
30MP UNIT SIZE OIL
016-045 POE 3MAF
050-071 PVE FVC32D
Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be OIL

visible in compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is EQUALIZATION
from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. All compressors must be off when LINE
checking oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method
is as follows:
ADD OIL — Additional oil may be required in 30MPA units.
Tables 37 and 38 provide an estimate of the amount of oil re-
quired, based on the line length and the recommended pipe siz-
es. The actual circuit oil charge will depend on the application
piping. The guidelines listed are estimates and will likely need
adjusting depending on the number of traps in the application
and the pipe sizes utilized.
No attempt should be made to increase the oil level in the
sight-glass above the 3/4 full level. A high oil level is not sus-
tainable in the compressor and the extra oil will be pumped out a30-6024
into the system causing a reduction in system efficiency and a
higher-than-normal oil circulation rate.
Fig. 43 — Typical Tandem Compressor Assembly
Add oil to suction line Schrader valve on tandem compres-
sors sets and the compressor Schrader on the trios. When oil
can be seen at the bottom of the sight glass, add oil in 5 oz in-
crements which is approximately 1/8 in oil level. Run all com-
pressors for 20 minutes then shut off to check oil level. Repeat
procedure until acceptable oil level is present.
NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved OIL
sources for 30MP016-045 units are: EQUALIZATION
Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3MAF POE, P903-1601 LINE
Mobil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EAL Arctic 32-3MA
Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF
The approved source for 30MP050-071 units is:
Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FVC32D, P903-2501
Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has
been exposed to atmosphere.
REMOVING OIL — If the oil level is determined to be too
high, oil can be removed from the Schrader fitting on the com-
pressors for the single and trio compressor circuits (See Fig. 43
and 44). Remove oil from the Schrader fitting on the oil equal-
izer tube for the tandem compressor circuits.
a30-6023
If the complete oil charge must be removed, an oil dip
tube assembly is required. The oil dip tube assembly is in-
serted into the compressor oil sight glass assembly. Oil dip Fig. 44 — Typical Trio Compressor Assembly
tube assemblies are available through Carrier Replacement
Components. Leaving the oil dip tube assembly in place is
not recommended.
54
Check Refrigerant Feed Components Check Unit Safeties
FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to maintain HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is pro-
a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described below) vided to protect the circuit and refrigeration system from unsafe
indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter drier is a high pressure conditions. For 30MP050-071, two different high
sealed-type drier for 30MP016-045 and removable core for pressure switches are used, depending on unit configuration. See
30MP050-071. When the drier needs to be changed, the entire fil- Table 51 for high-pressure switch settings.
ter drier must be replaced for 30MP016-045 units. The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of
MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located the circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist, the
immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the switch opens and shuts off the unit. The MBB senses the HPS
refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for feedback signal and generates an appropriate alarm. The MBB
refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit prevents the circuit from restarting until the alert condition is reset.
loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in The switch should open at the pressure corresponding to the ap-
the sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged propriate switch setting as shown in Table 51.
system or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the sys-
tem, measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of Table 51 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure Switch
the indicator as follows: (Fixed)
Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm CUTOUT CUT-IN PART
Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm UNIT
Psig kPa Psig kPa NUMBER
Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm All 30MP016-045;
The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the mois- 30MPA050-071, 650 4482 500 3447 HK02ZZ001
ture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in contact 30MPW050-071
High Condensing
with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in the system,
change the corresponding filter drier. 30MPW050-071 558 3848 435 3000 HK02ZZ003
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) (30MP016- Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display. The unit
045 ONLY) — The TXV controls the flow of liquid refrigerant should restart after the compressor anti-short-cycle delay, built
to the cooler by maintaining constant superheat of vapor leaving into the unit control module, expires.
the cooler. The valve is activated by a temperature-sensing bulb PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each unit is equipped with a
strapped to the suction line. suction and discharge pressure transducer. These inputs to the
The valve(s) is factory-set to maintain between 8 and 10°F MBB are not only used to monitor the status of the unit, but also to
(4.4 and 5.6°C) of superheat leaving the cooler. Check the su- maintain operation of the chiller within the compressor manufac-
perheat during operation after conditions have stabilized. If turer’s specified limits. The input to the MBB from the suction
necessary, adjust the superheat to prevent refrigerant floodback pressure transducer is also used to protect the compressor from op-
to the compressor. erating at low pressure conditions. If suction return gas thermistors
are installed, then additional low superheat conditions are detect-
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the
factory-installed hot gas bypass option, a solenoid valve and ed. In some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full capacity.
discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located The control module will automatically reduce the capacity of a cir-
cuit as needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operat-
between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant
line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load ing pressures.
valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION
suction pressure set point of the valve. The bypass valve has an
adjustable opening setting between 95 to 115 psig (655 to 793 WARNING
kPa). The factory setting is 105 psig (724 kPa).
The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the minimum On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solution
load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with the mini- must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a temperature of
mum load valve is shown in Table 14. at least 15°F (8.3°C) below the leaving-fluid temperature set
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pressure point. Failure to provide the proper anti-freeze solution mix-
ture is considered abuse and may impair or otherwise nega-
relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which relieves at
210°F (100°C). tively impact the Carrier warranty.
The 30MPW unit does not have a condenser pressure re- The main base board (MBB) monitors cooler leaving fluid
lief valve because the brazed-plate condenser is not consid- temperature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of
ered a pressure vessel, as defined in ANSI/ASHRAE 15 capacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the
(American National Standards Institute/American Society of rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.
Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
safety code requirements. When the cooler is exposed to lower temperatures (40°F
[4.4°C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using inhibited
For 30MPA condenserless units, pressure relief devices de- ethylene or propylene glycol.
signed to relieve at the pressure determined in local codes, must be
field-supplied and installed in the discharge line piping in accor- Thermistors
dance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 safety code requirements. Addi- Electronic control uses up to five 5,000 ohm thermistors to
tional pressure relief valves, properly selected, must be field-sup- sense temperatures used to control operation of the chiller. Therm-
plied and installed to protect high side equipment and may be re- istors EWT, LWT, RGT.A, CNDE, CNDL, and OAT are identical
quired by applicable codes. in their temperature and voltage drop performance. The SPT space
Most codes require that a relief valve be vented directly to the temperature thermistor has a 10,000 ohm input channel and it has
outdoors. The vent line must not be smaller than the relief valve a different set of temperature vs. resistance and voltage drop per-
outlet. Consult ANSI/ASHRAE 15 for detailed information con- formance. Resistance values at various temperatures are listed in
cerning layout and sizing of relief vent lines. Tables 52-56. For dual chiller operation, a dual chiller sensor is re-
quired which is a 5,000 ohm thermistor.
55
REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE,
CNDL) — Add a small amount of thermal conductive grease
to the thermistor well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten
the retaining nut ¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 45.
5/8 in. HEX
1/4-18 NPT
6" MINIMUM
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR
REMOVAL
Fig. 45 — Thermistor Well
THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A
high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this
check.
1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate the-
mistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the main base
board (see Fig. 46).
2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem- LEGEND
perature from Tables 52-56. ACCSY — Accessory
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at EFT — Entering Fluid Temperature
probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem- LFT — Leaving Fluid Temperature
perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to LWT — Leaving Water Temperature Sensor
LVT — Low Voltage Terminal
avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor
Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor
determined from thermistor voltage reading should be SEN — Sensor Terminal Block
close, ± 5°F (3°C) if care was taken in applying thermo- SPT — Space Temperature Sensor
couple and taking readings.
Fig. 46 — Thermistor Connections to
If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down Main Base Board, J8 Connector
and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature
(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage Chilled Water Flow Switch
drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter-
mining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor A factory-installed flow switch is installed in the leaving
disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the fluid piping for all units. This is a thermal-dispersion flow
value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set for approxi-
scrolling marquee display. mately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two thermistors
and a heater element. One thermistor is located in the sensor
Pressure Transducers tip, closest to the flowing fluid. See Fig. 47. This thermistor is
The suction and discharge transducers are different part used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The
numbers and can be distinguished by the color of the transduc- second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is af-
er body, suction (yellow) and discharge (red). No pressure fected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The
transducer calibration is required. The transducers operate on a thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall
5 vdc supply, which is generated by the main base board of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated
(MBB). See Fig. 46 for transducer connections to the J8 con- from each other within the confines of the probe.
nector on the MBB.
TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of
being faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer.
Supply voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is
correct, compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling
marquee display module against pressure shown on a cali-
brated pressure gage. Pressure readings should be within
± 15 psig. If the two readings are not reasonably close, re-
place the pressure transducer. a30-499
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Fig. 47 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the
thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the
56
probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indicate
away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch contacts.
function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing liq- The LEDs are as follows:
uid. • Green LED ON – 24 vac present
The difference in temperature between the two thermistors pro- • One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN
vides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe. When • Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED
fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away from the If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the steps
heated thermistor and the temperature differential will be small. below to correct the situation:
As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken from the heated
thermistor and there will be an increase in temperature differential. 1. Check to confirm that the field-installed strainer is clean.
Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the screen and
When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then the clean it. For the case of VFD controlled pumps, ensure that
output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove flow the minimum speed setting has not been changed.
has been established. 2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler and compare this
For recommended maintenance, check the flow switch opera- to the system requirements.
tion. If operation is erratic check the sensor tip for build-up every 3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the termi-
6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If necessary, build-up nal block are secure.
(e.g., lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing
agent. 4. Check for proper pump motor rotation.
Table 52 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL, Dual Chiller, and OAT
TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE

(F) DROP (Ohms) (F) DROP (Ohms) (F) DROP (Ohms)
(V) (V) (V)
–25 3.699 98.010 18 3.016 24,505 61 1.930 7,468
–24 3.689 94,707 19 2.994 23,789 62 1.905 7,277
–23 3.679 91,522 20 2.972 23,096 63 1.879 7,091
–22 3.668 88,449 21 2.949 22,427 64 1.854 6,911
–21 3.658 85,486 22 2.926 21,779 65 1.829 6,735
–20 3.647 82,627 23 2.903 21,153 66 1.804 6,564
–19 3.636 79,871 24 2.879 20,547 67 1.779 6,399
–18 3.624 77,212 25 2.856 19,960 68 1.754 6,238
–17 3.613 74,648 26 2.832 19,393 69 1.729 6,081
–16 3.601 72,175 27 2.808 18,843 70 1.705 5,929
–15 3.588 69,790 28 2.784 18,311 71 1.681 5,781
–14 3.576 67,490 29 2.759 17,796 72 1.656 5,637
–13 3.563 65,272 30 2.735 17,297 73 1.632 5,497
–12 3.550 63,133 31 2.710 16,814 74 1.609 5,361
–11 3.536 61,070 32 2.685 16,346 75 1.585 5,229
–10 3.523 59,081 33 2.660 15,892 76 1.562 5,101
–9 3.509 57,162 34 2.634 15,453 77 1.538 4,976
–8 3.494 55,311 35 2.609 15,027 78 1.516 4,855
–7 3.480 53,526 36 2.583 14,614 79 1.493 4,737
–6 3.465 51,804 37 2.558 14,214 80 1.470 4,622
–5 3.450 50,143 38 2.532 13,826 81 1.448 4,511
–4 3.434 48,541 39 2.506 13,449 82 1.426 4,403
–3 3.418 46,996 40 2.480 13,084 83 1.404 4,298
–2 3.402 45,505 41 2.454 12,730 84 1.382 4,196
–1 3.386 44,066 42 2.428 12,387 85 1.361 4,096
0 3.369 42,679 43 2.402 12,053 86 1.340 4,000
1 3.352 41,339 44 2.376 11,730 87 1.319 3,906
2 3.335 40,047 45 2.349 11,416 88 1.298 3,814
3 3.317 38,800 46 2.323 11,112 89 1.278 3,726
4 3.299 37,596 47 2.296 10,816 90 1.257 3,640
5 3.281 36,435 48 2.270 10,529 91 1.237 3,556
6 3.262 35,313 49 2.244 10,250 92 1.217 3,474
7 3.243 34,231 50 2.217 9,979 93 1.198 3,395
8 3.224 33,185 51 2.191 9,717 94 1.179 3,318
9 3.205 32,176 52 2.165 9,461 95 1.160 3,243
10 3.185 31,202 53 2.138 9,213 96 1.141 3,170
11 3.165 30,260 54 2.112 8,973 97 1.122 3,099
12 3.145 29,351 55 2.086 8,739 98 1.104 3,031
13 3.124 28,473 56 2.060 8,511 99 1.086 2,964
14 3.103 27,624 57 2.034 8,291 100 1.068 2,898
15 3.082 26,804 58 2.008 8,076 101 1.051 2,835
16 3.060 26,011 59 1,982 7,686 102 1.033 2,773
17 3.038 25,245 60 1.956 7,665
57
Table 52 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL, Dual Chiller, and OAT) (cont)
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE

TEMP DROP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE TEMP DROP RESISTANCE
(F) (V) (Ohms) (F) (V) (Ohms) (F) (V) (Ohms)
103 1.016 2,713 144 0.502 1,165 185 0.251 516
104 0.999 2,655 145 0.494 1,141 186 0.247 508
105 0.983 2,597 146 0.485 1,118 187 0.243 501
106 0.966 2,542 147 0.477 1,095 188 0.239 494
107 0.950 2,488 148 0.469 1,072 189 0.235 487
108 0.934 2,436 149 0.461 1,050 190 0.231 480
109 0.918 2,385 150 0.453 1,029 191 0.228 473
110 0.903 2,335 151 0.445 1,007 192 0.224 467
111 0.888 2,286 152 0.438 986 193 0.220 461
112 0.873 2,239 153 0.430 965 194 0.217 456
113 0.858 2,192 154 0.423 945 195 0.213 450
114 0.843 2,147 155 0.416 925 196 0.210 445
115 0.829 2,103 156 0.408 906 197 0.206 439
116 0.815 2,060 157 0.402 887 198 0.203 434
117 0.801 2,018 158 0.395 868 199 0.200 429
118 0.787 1,977 159 0.388 850 200 0.197 424
119 0.774 1,937 160 0.381 832 201 0.194 419
120 0.761 1,898 161 0.375 815 202 0.191 415
121 0.748 1,860 162 0.369 798 203 0.188 410
122 0.735 1,822 163 0.362 782 204 0.185 405
123 0.723 1,786 164 0.356 765 205 0.182 401
124 0.710 1,750 165 0.350 750 206 0.179 396
125 0.698 1,715 166 0.344 734 207 0.176 391
126 0.686 1,680 167 0.339 719 208 0.173 386
127 0.674 1,647 168 0.333 705 209 0.171 382
128 0.663 1,614 169 0.327 690 210 0.168 377
129 0.651 1,582 170 0.322 677 211 0.165 372
130 0.640 1,550 171 0.317 663 212 0.163 367
131 0.629 1,519 172 0.311 650 213 0.160 361
132 0.618 1,489 173 0.306 638 214 0.158 356
133 0.608 1,459 174 0.301 626 215 0.155 350
134 0.597 1,430 175 0.296 614 216 0.153 344
135 0.587 1,401 176 0.291 602 217 0.151 338
136 0.577 1,373 177 0.286 591 218 0.148 332
137 0.567 1,345 178 0.282 581 219 0.146 325
138 0.557 1,318 179 0.277 570 220 0.144 318
139 0.548 1,291 180 0.272 561 221 0.142 311
140 0.538 1,265 181 0.268 551 222 0.140 304
141 0.529 1,240 182 0.264 542 223 0.138 297
142 0.520 1,214 183 0.259 533 224 0.135 289
143 0.511 1.190 184 0.255 524 225 0.133 282
58
Table 53 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL, Dual Chiller, and OAT)

(C) (V) (Ohms) (C) (V) (Ohms) (C) (V) (Ohms)
–32 3.705 100,260 15 1.982 7,855 62 0.506 1,158

–31 3.687 94,165 16 1.935 7,499 63 0.490 1,118
–30 3.668 88,480 17 1.889 7,161 64 0.475 1,079
–29 3.649 83,170 18 1.844 6,840 65 0.461 1,041
–28 3.629 78,125 19 1.799 6,536 66 0.447 1,006
–27 3.608 73,580 20 1.754 6,246 67 0.433 971
–26 3.586 69,250 21 1.710 5,971 68 0.420 938
–25 3.563 65,205 22 1.666 5,710 69 0.407 906
–24 3.539 61,420 23 1.623 5,461 70 0.395 876
–23 3.514 57,875 24 1.580 5,225 71 0.383 836
–22 3.489 54,555 25 1.538 5,000 72 0.371 805
–21 3.462 51,450 26 1.497 4,786 73 0.360 775
–20 3.434 48,536 27 1.457 4,583 74 0.349 747
–19 3.406 45,807 28 1.417 4,389 75 0.339 719
–18 3.376 43,247 29 1.378 4,204 76 0.329 693
–17 3.345 40,845 30 1.340 4,028 77 0.319 669
–16 3.313 38,592 31 1.302 3,861 78 0.309 645
–15 3.281 38,476 32 1.265 3,701 79 0.300 623
–14 3.247 34,489 33 1.229 3,549 80 0.291 602
–13 3.212 32,621 34 1.194 3,404 81 0.283 583
–12 3.177 30,866 35 1.160 3,266 82 0.274 564
–11 3.140 29,216 36 1.126 3,134 83 0.266 547
–10 3.103 27,633 37 1.093 3,008 84 0.258 531
–9 3.065 26,202 38 1.061 2,888 85 0.251 516
–8 3.025 24,827 39 1.030 2,773 86 0.244 502
–7 2.985 23,532 40 0.999 2,663 87 0.237 489
–6 2.945 22,313 41 0.969 2,559 88 0.230 477
–5 2.903 21,163 42 0.940 2,459 89 0.223 466
–4 2.860 20,079 43 0.912 2,363 90 0.217 456
–3 2.817 19,058 44 0.885 2,272 91 0.211 446
–2 2.774 18,094 45 0.858 2,184 92 0.204 436
–1 2.730 17,184 46 0.832 2,101 93 0.199 427
0 2.685 16,325 47 0.807 2,021 94 0.193 419
1 2.639 15,515 48 0.782 1,944 95 0.188 410
2 2.593 14,749 49 0.758 1,871 96 0.182 402
3 2.547 14,026 50 0.735 1,801 97 0.177 393
4 2.500 13,342 51 0.713 1,734 98 0.172 385
5 2.454 12,696 52 0.691 1,670 99 0.168 376
6 2.407 12,085 53 0.669 1,609 100 0.163 367
7 2.360 11,506 54 0.649 1,550 101 0.158 357
8 2.312 10,959 55 0.629 1,493 102 0.154 346
9 2.265 10,441 56 0.610 1,439 103 0.150 335
10 2.217 9,949 57 0.591 1,387 104 0.146 324
11 2.170 9,485 58 0.573 1,337 105 0.142 312
12 2.123 9,044 59 0.555 1,290 106 0.138 299
13 2.076 8,627 60 0.538 1,244 107 0.134 285
14 2.029 8,231 61 0.522 1,200
59
Table 54 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(For SPT)

–25 4.758 196,453 18 4.153 49,065 61 2.994 14.925

–24 4.750 189,692 19 4.132 47,627 62 2.963 14,549
–23 4.741 183,300 20 4.111 46,240 63 2.932 14,180
–22 4.733 177,000 21 4.089 44,888 64 2.901 13,824
–21 4.724 171,079 22 4.067 43,598 65 2.870 13,478
–20 4.715 165,238 23 4.044 42,324 66 2.839 13,139
–19 4.705 159,717 24 4.021 41,118 67 2.808 12,814
–18 4.696 154,344 25 3.998 39,926 68 2.777 12,493
–17 4.686 149,194 26 3.975 38,790 69 2.746 12,187
–16 4.676 144,250 27 3.951 37,681 70 2.715 11,884
–15 4.665 139,443 28 3.927 36,610 71 2.684 11,593
–14 4.655 134,891 29 3.903 35,577 72 2.653 11,308
–13 4.644 130,402 30 3.878 34,569 73 2.622 11,031
–12 4.633 126,183 31 3.853 33,606 74 2.592 10,764
–11 4.621 122,018 32 3.828 32,654 75 2.561 10,501
–10 4.609 118,076 33 3.802 31,752 76 2.530 10,249
–9 4.597 114,236 34 3.776 30,860 77 2.500 10,000
–8 4.585 110,549 35 3.750 30,009 78 2.470 9,762
–7 4.572 107,006 36 3.723 29,177 79 2.439 9,526
–6 4.560 103,558 37 3.697 28,373 80 2.409 9,300
–5 4.546 100,287 38 3.670 27,597 81 2.379 9,078
–4 4.533 97,060 39 3.654 26,838 82 2.349 8,862
–3 4.519 94,020 40 3.615 26,113 83 2.319 8,653
–2 4.505 91,019 41 3.587 25,396 84 2.290 8,448
–1 4.490 88,171 42 3.559 24,715 85 2.260 8,251
0 4.476 85,396 43 3.531 24,042 86 2.231 8,056
1 4.461 82,729 44 3.503 23,399 87 2.202 7,869
2 4.445 80,162 45 3.474 22,770 88 2.173 7,685
3 4.429 77,662 46 3.445 22,161 89 2.144 7,507
4 4.413 75,286 47 3.416 21,573 90 2.115 7,333
5 4.397 72,940 48 3.387 20,998 91 2.087 7,165
6 4.380 70,727 49 3.357 20,447 92 2.059 6,999
7 4.363 68,542 50 3.328 19,903 93 2.030 6,838
8 4.346 66,465 51 3.298 19,386 94 2.003 6,683
9 4.328 64,439 52 3.268 18,874 95 1.975 6,530
10 4.310 62,491 53 3.238 18,384 96 1.948 6,383
11 4.292 60,612 54 3.208 17,904 97 1.921 6,238
12 4.273 58,781 55 3.178 17,441 98 1.894 6,098
13 4.254 57,039 56 3.147 16,991 99 1.867 5,961
14 4.235 55,319 57 3.117 16,552 100 1.841 5,827
15 4.215 53,693 58 3.086 16,131 101 1.815 5,698
16 4.195 52,086 59 3.056 15,714 102 1.789 5,571
17 4.174 50,557 60 3.025 15,317
60
Table 54 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(For SPT) (cont)

103 1.763 5,449 144 0.934 2,297 185 0.483 1,070
104 1.738 5,327 145 0.919 2,253 186 0.476 1,052
105 1.713 5,210 146 0.905 2,209 187 0.468 1,033
106 1.688 5,095 147 0.890 2,166 188 0.461 1,016
107 1.663 4,984 148 0.876 2,124 189 0.454 998
108 1.639 4,876 149 0.862 2,083 190 0.447 981
109 1.615 4,769 150 0.848 2,043 191 0.440 964
110 1.591 4,666 151 0.835 2,003 192 0.433 947
111 1.567 4,564 152 0.821 1,966 193 0.426 931
112 1.544 4,467 153 0.808 1,928 194 0.419 915
113 1.521 4,370 154 0.795 1,891 195 0.413 900
114 1.498 4,277 155 0.782 1,855 196 0.407 885
115 1.475 4,185 156 0.770 1,820 197 0.400 870
116 1.453 4,096 157 0.758 1,786 198 0.394 855
117 1.431 4,008 158 0.745 1,752 199 0.388 841
118 1.409 3,923 159 0.733 1,719 200 0.382 827
119 1.387 3,840 160 0.722 1,687 201 0.376 814
120 1.366 3,759 161 0.710 1,656 202 0.370 800
121 1.345 3,681 162 0.699 1,625 203 0.365 787
122 1.324 3,603 163 0.687 1,594 204 0.359 774
123 1.304 3,529 164 0.676 1,565 205 0.354 762
124 1.284 3,455 165 0.666 1,536 206 0.349 749
125 1.264 3,383 166 0.655 1,508 207 0.343 737
126 1.244 3,313 167 0.645 1,480 208 0.338 725
127 1.225 3,244 168 0.634 1,453 209 0.333 714
128 1.206 3,178 169 0.624 1,426 210 0.328 702
129 1.187 3,112 170 0.614 1,400 211 0.323 691
130 1.168 3,049 171 0.604 1,375 212 0.318 680
131 1.150 2,986 172 0.595 1,350 213 0.314 670
132 1.132 2,926 173 0.585 1,326 214 0.309 659
133 1.114 2,866 174 0.576 1,302 215 0.305 649
134 1.096 2,809 175 0.567 1,278 216 0.300 639
135 1.079 2,752 176 0.558 1,255 217 0.296 629
136 1.062 2,697 177 0.549 1,233 218 0.292 620
137 1.045 2,643 178 0.540 1,211 219 0.288 610
138 1.028 2,590 179 0.532 1,190 220 0.284 601
139 1.012 2,539 180 0.523 1,169 221 0.279 592
140 0.996 2,488 181 0.515 1,148 222 0.275 583
141 0.980 2,439 182 0.507 1,128 223 0.272 574
142 0.965 2,391 183 0.499 1,108 224 0.268 566
143 0.949 2,343 184 0.491 1,089 225 0.264 557
61
Table 55 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(For SPT)

(C) (V) (Ohms) (C) (V) (Ohms) (C) (V) (Ohms)
–32 4.762 200,510 15 3.056 15,714 62 0.940 2,315

–31 4.748 188,340 16 3.000 15,000 63 0.913 2,235
–30 4.733 177,000 17 2.944 14,323 64 0.887 2,157
–29 4.716 166,342 18 2.889 13,681 65 0.862 2,083
–28 4.700 156,404 19 2.833 13,071 66 0.837 2,011
–27 4.682 147,134 20 2.777 12,493 67 0.813 1,943
–26 4.663 138,482 21 2.721 11,942 68 0.790 1,876
–25 4.644 130,402 22 2.666 11,418 69 0.767 1,813
–24 4.624 122,807 23 2.610 10,921 70 0.745 1,752
–23 4.602 115,710 24 2.555 10,449 71 0.724 1,693
–22 4.580 109,075 25 2.500 10,000 72 0.703 1,637
–21 4.557 102,868 26 2.445 9,571 73 0.683 1,582
–20 4.533 97,060 27 2.391 9,164 74 0.663 1,530
–19 4.508 91,588 28 2.337 8,776 75 0.645 1,480
–18 4.482 86,463 29 2.284 8,407 76 0.626 1,431
–17 4.455 81,662 30 2.231 8,056 77 0.608 1,385
–16 4.426 77,162 31 2.178 7,720 78 0.591 1,340
–15 4.397 72,940 32 2.127 7,401 79 0.574 1,297
–14 4.367 68,957 33 2.075 7,096 80 0.558 1,255
–13 4.335 65,219 34 2.025 6,806 81 0.542 1,215
–12 4.303 61,711 35 1.975 6,530 82 0.527 1,177
–11 4.269 58,415 36 1.926 6,266 83 0.512 1,140
–10 4.235 55,319 37 1.878 6,014 84 0.497 1,104
–9 4.199 52,392 38 1.830 5,774 85 0.483 1,070
–8 4.162 49,640 39 1.784 5,546 86 0.470 1,037
–7 4.124 47,052 40 1.738 5,327 87 0.457 1,005
–6 4.085 44,617 41 1.692 5,117 88 0.444 974
–5 4.044 42,324 42 1.648 4,918 89 0.431 944
–4 4.003 40,153 43 1.605 4,727 90 0.419 915
–3 3.961 38,109 44 1.562 4,544 91 0.408 889
–2 3.917 36,182 45 1.521 4,370 92 0.396 861
–1 3.873 34,367 46 1.480 4,203 93 0.386 836
0 3.828 32,654 47 1.439 4,042 94 0.375 811
1 3.781 31,030 48 1.400 3,889 95 0.365 787
2 3.734 29,498 49 1.362 3,743 96 0.355 764
3 3.686 28,052 50 1.324 3,603 97 0.345 742
4 3.637 26,686 51 1.288 3,469 98 0.336 721
5 3.587 25,396 52 1.252 3,340 99 0.327 700
6 3.537 24,171 53 1.217 3,217 100 0.318 680
7 3.485 23,013 54 1.183 3,099 101 0.310 661
8 3.433 21,918 55 1.150 2,986 102 0.302 643
9 3.381 20,883 56 1.117 2,878 103 0.294 626
10 3.328 19,903 57 1.086 2,774 104 0.287 609
11 3.274 18,972 58 1.055 2,675 105 0.279 592
12 3.220 18,090 59 1.025 2,579 106 0.272 576
13 3.165 17,255 60 0.996 2,488 107 0.265 561
14 3.111 16,464 61 0.968 2,400
62
Table 56 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)
TEMP TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP TEMP RESISTANCE

(C) (F) (Ohms) (C) (F) (Ohms)
-40 -40 2,889,600 75 167 12,730
-35 -31 2,087,220 80 176 10,790
-30 -22 1,522,200 85 185 9,200
-25 -13 1,121,440 90 194 7,870
-20 -4 834,720 95 203 6,770
-15 5 627,280 100 212 5,850
-10 14 475,740 105 221 5,090
-5 23 363,990 110 230 4,450
0 32 280,820 115 239 3,870
5 41 218,410 120 248 3,350
10 50 171,170 125 257 2,920
15 59 135,140 130 266 2,580
20 68 107,440 135 275 2,280
25 77 86,000 140 284 2,020
30 86 69,280 145 293 1,800
35 95 56,160 150 302 1,590
40 104 45,810 155 311 1,390
45 113 37,580 160 320 1,250
50 122 30,990 165 329 1,120
55 131 25,680 170 338 1,010
60 140 21,400 175 347 920
70 158 15,070 180 356 830
Strainer 3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switches

Periodic cleaning of the required field-installed strainer is (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the defec-
required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi tive module.
(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pres- NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to avoid
sure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the blowdown electrostatic discharge.
valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut the chiller down 4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new mod-
and remove the strainer screen to clean. When strainer has ule for return to Carrier.
been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Maintenance Done 5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a Phil-
(Run StatusPMS.T.MN).
lips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.
Replacing Defective Modules 6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator™
The Comfort-Link replacement modules are shown in Table device replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in
57. If the main base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that the LEN connector.
all configuration data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode 7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring
table and verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and power.
OPT2 are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or 8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch is
options (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as in the OFF position.
well as any specific time and maintenance schedules.
9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs blink
Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30MP Liquid Chillers in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking and that
(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is communi-
This information is needed later in this procedure. If the checklist cating correctly.
does not exist, fill out the current information in the Configuration
mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and configura- 10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points and
tions as needed for this particular installation. schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CON-
TROL switch to its previous position.
WARNING Table 57 — Replacement Modules
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off REPLACEMENT
all power to this equipment during installation. There may be MODULE PART NO.
(with Software)
more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations
to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. Main Base Board (MBB) 30MP500346
Scrolling Marquee Display HK50AA031
1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect Energy Management Module (EMM) 30GT515218
all wires from the defective module by unplugging its Navigator Display HK50AA033
connectors.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) 30GT515217
2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting
screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the module
from the control box. Save the screws for later use.
63
MAINTENANCE COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when cool-
ing load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to satisfy
Recommended Maintenance Schedule leaving fluid temperature set point.
The following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite condi- THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an
tions may dictate that maintenance tasks are performed more open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace
often than recommended. EWT, or LWT as required. Unit restarts automatically, but
Every month: must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the scrolling
• Check water quality. Inspection interval to be determined by marquee.
site conditions and water quality specialist.
• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refriger- CAUTION
ant loss and presence of moisture.
Every 3 months (for all machines): If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the
• Check refrigerant charge. safety devices listed, determine and correct cause before
attempting another restart.
• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks,
repair as necessary. ENABLING AND DISABLING COMPRESSORS — Com-
• Check chilled water flow switch operation. pressors in the 30MP units can be enabled or disabled in the con-
• Check compressor oil level. trols. To enable or disable a compressor, toggle the value in the
Every 6 months (for all machines): ConfigurationSERV menu for each individual compressor.
• Clean chilled water/condenser water flow switch sensor tip. COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE — A disk-
Every 12 months (for all machines): type check valve in the discharge of the compressor prevents high
• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary. pressure discharge gas from flowing rapidly back through the
• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary. compressor at shutdown. This same check valve prevents a high
• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than ± 2°F to low side bypass in multiple compressor circuits.
(1.2°C) variance from calibrated thermometer. LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can lead
• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls have sever-
is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable. al override modes built in which will attempt to keep the chiller
• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated. from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant charge and
• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop, plugged filter driers are the main causes for this condition. To
replace as necessary. The 30MP016-045 units contain a avoid permanent damage and potential freezing of the system, do
hermetic filter drier. The 30MP050-071 units contain a NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm conditions without
replaceable core type filter drier. identifying and correcting the cause(s).
• Check chilled water and condenser strainers, clean as nec-
COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30MP units with Com-
essary.
• Perform Service Test to confirm the operation of all compo- fortLink controls include a compressor protection board that pro-
nents. tects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board senses
the presence or absence of current to each compressor.
• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled Water
Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which may If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is no
indicate fouling. Clean evaporator if necessary. current, then one of the following safeties or conditions have
• Check for excessive condenser approach (Saturated Discharge turned the compressor off:
Pressure – Leaving Condenser Water Temperature) which may Compressor Overcurrent — All compressors have internal line
indicate fouling. Clean condenser if necessary (30MPW only). breaks or a motor protection device located in the compressor
electrical box.
TROUBLESHOOTING Compressor Short Circuit — There will not be current if the
compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection
Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart has tripped.
Possible causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown Compressor Motor Over Temperature — The internal line-break
below and in Table 58. Refer to Fig. 2-6 for component arrange- or over temperature switch has opened.
ment and control wiring diagrams.
High-Pressure Switch Trip — The high-pressure switch has
GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored, re- opened. See Table 51 for the factory settings for the fixed high-
start is automatic through normal MBB start-up. pressure switch.
UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH IS ASTP Protection Trip (30MP016-045 Only) — All non-digi-
OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediately. tal Copeland compressors are equipped with an advanced
Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch control scroll temperature protection (ASTP). A label located above
or in the REMOTE CONTROL position for control through re- the terminal box identifies models that contain this technolo-
mote control closure. gy. See Fig. 48.
CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN — Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of internal
After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected, re- discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll compres-
set is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee. sor when the internal temperature reaches approximately 300°F
OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — Deter- (149°C). At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk valve opens
mine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit breaker(s). and causes the scroll elements to separate, which stops compres-
Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is complete. sion. Suction and discharge pressures balance while the motor
continues to run. The longer the compressor runs unloaded, the
longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk resets. See Fig. 49 for
approximate reset times.
64
Table 58 — Troubleshooting
SYMPTOMS CAUSE REMEDY
Compressor Cycles Loss of charge control. Acting erratically. Repair leak and recharge.
Off on Loss of Charge
Replace control.
Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant.
Low suction temperature Raise cooler leaving fluid temperature set point.
Compressor Cycles Off on Out Thermistor failure Replace thermistor.
of Range Condition
System load was reduced faster than controller could Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the
remove stages control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load or
increase loop volume.
Temperature controller deadband setting is too low Raise deadband setting.
Compressor Shuts Down on High-pressure control acting erratically Replace control.
High-Pressure Control
Non-condensables in system Purge system.
Condenser scaled/dirty (30MPW) Clean condenser.
Fans in remote condensing unit (30MPA only) not operating Repair or replace if defective.
System overcharged with refrigerant Reduce charge.
Unit Operates Too Long Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant.
or Continuously
Control contacts fused Replace control.
Air in system Purge system.
Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Clean or replace as needed.
Defective insulation Replace or repair as needed.
Service load Keep doors and windows closed.
Damaged compressor Check compressor and replace if necessary.
Unusual or Loud System Piping vibration Support piping as required.
Noises
Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor
Expansion valve hissing Check refrigerant charge.
Check for plugged liquid line filter drier.
Compressor noisy Replace compressor (worn bearings).
Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.
Operation outside of compressor operating envelope. Con-
sider head pressure control, clean condenser. Check water
flow (cooler and condenser).
Compressor not pumping Advanced scroll temperature protection is active. Determine
high discharge temperature reason.
Compressor Loses Oil Leak in system Repair leak.
Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Replace compressor.
Oil trapped in line Check piping for oil traps.
Hot Liquid Line Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Repair leak and recharge.
Frosted Liquid Line Restricted filter drier Replace filter drier.
Frosted Suction Line Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a Replace valve if defective.
normal condition for brine applications)
Stuck TXV (thermostatic expansion valve) Replace valve if defective.
Freeze-Up Improper Charging Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler
while charging. Charge with vapor until saturated suction
temperature is above 32°F (0°C), then charge with liquid.
Low Water Flow Verify proper flow through evaporator. Check for restrictions
in chilled water piping, clean strainer, vent air from system.
System not properly winterized Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate gly-
col mixture to prevent freezing of heat exchanger.
Plugged Heat Exchanger 40 mesh strainer installed within 10 ft. of unit. Strainer main-
tenance performed as recommended.
Sensor accuracy Verify thermistors are fully inserted into wells. Verify accu-
racy of thermistors and transducers as recommended.
65
be allowed for the motor to cool down before the overload will re-
set. If current monitoring to the compressor is available, the sys-
tem controller can take advantage of the compressor internal over-
load operation. The controller can lock out the compressor if cur-
rent draw is not coincident with contactor energizing, implying
that the compressor has shut off on its internal overload. This will
prevent unnecessary compressor cycling on a fault condition until
corrective action can be taken.
COPELAND COMPRESSORS MODELS WITH ELECTRI-
CAL CODE TW OR TE
CAUTION
Fig. 48 — Advanced Scroll Temperature The electronic motor protection module is a safety device that
Protection Label must not be bypassed or compressor damage may result.
Models with a “TW” or “TE” in the electrical code (i.e.,
120
ZP182KCE-TWD or ZP182KCE-TED) have a motor overload
Recommended Cooling Time
110 system that consists of an external electronic control module con-

100 nected to a chain of four thermistors embedded in the motor wind-
90 ings. The module will trip and remain off for a minimum of 30
80 minutes if the motor temperature exceeds a preset point to allow
70 the scrolls to cool down after the motor temperature limit has been
(Minutes)
60 reached. It may take as long as two hours for the motor to cool
50 down before the overload will reset.
40 NOTE: Turning off power to the module will reset it immediately.
30
20
10 CAUTION
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Restoring the compressor sooner may cause a destructive tem-
Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes) perature build up in the scrolls.
*Times are approximate.
NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature, For this reason, module power must never be switched with the
and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times. control circuit voltage.
Fig. 49 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Current sensing boards monitor to the compressor current. The
Time After Compressor is Stopped* ComfortLink control system takes advantage of the compressor
To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped overload operation by locking out the compressor if current draw
and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor is not detected. This will prevent unnecessary compressor cycling
will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to 90 min- on a fault condition until corrective action can be taken.
utes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will reset auto- Kriwan Motor Protection Module Troubleshooting — Cope-
matically before the motor protector resets, which may take up to land models with a “TW” in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-
2 hours. TWD), have a motor overload system that consists of an external
High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection — Units Kriwan2 electronic control module. These have been replaced by
equipped with optional digital compressors have an addi- the CoreSense3 communication module for motor protection. This
tional thermistor located on the discharge line. If discharge section is included for reference, and contains instructions for re-
temperature exceeds 265°F (129.4°C), the digital compres- placing the Kriwan module with the CoreSense module in the
sor will be shut off. field.
Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunctions Follow the steps listed below to troubleshoot the Kriwan mod-
or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If the ule in the field. See wiring diagram on terminal box cover, or Fig.
compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor reads ON, 50.
an alert is generated. This will indicate that a compressor contactor
has failed closed. In this case, a special mode, Compressor Stuck
on Control, will be enabled and all other compressors will be WARNING
turned off. An alarm will then be enabled to indicate that service is
required. Outdoor fans will continue to operate. The condenser Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed.
output is turned on immediately. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, resulting in
personal injury or death.
Motor Overload Protection
COPELAND1 COMPRESSORS MODELS WITH ELECTRI-
CAL CODE TF — Models with a “TF” in the electrical code
(i.e., ZP182KCE-TFE) have an internal line break motor overload
located in the center of the Y of the motor windings. This overload
disconnects all three legs of the motor from power in case of an
over-current or over-temperature condition. The overload reacts to
a combination of motor current and motor winding temperature.
The internal overload protects against single phasing. Time must
2. Kriwan is a registered trademark of Kriwan Industrie-Elektronik. GmbH

1. Copeland is a registered trademark of Emerson Climate 3. CoreSense is a registered trademark of Emerson Climate
Technologies. Technologies.
66
WARNING CAUTION
Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor currents Use an ohmmeter with a maximum of 9 volts to check the sen-
when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the problems sor chain. The sensor chain is sensitive and easily damaged;
described below before installing and running a replacement no attempt should be made to check continuity through it with
compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling anything other than an ohmmeter. The application of any
refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning can cause fire, external voltage to the sensor chain may cause damage requir-
resulting in personal injury or death. ing the replacement of the compressor.
d. The diagnosis of this resistance reading is as follows:
CAUTION • 200 to 2250 ohms: Normal operating range
• 2750 ohms or greater: Compressor overheated. Allow
Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the time to cool.
machine may result. • Zero resistance: Shorted sensor circuit. Replace the
compressor.
• Infinite resistance: Open sensor circuit. Replace the
compressor.
4. If the resistance reading is abnormal, remove the sensor con-
nector plug from the compressor and measure the resistance
at the sensor fusite pins. This will determine if the abnormal
reading was due to a faulty connector.
5. On initial start-up, and after any module trip, the resistance
of the sensor chain must be below the module reset point be-
fore the module circuit will close. Reset values are 2250 to
3000 ohms.
6. If the sensor chain has a resistance that is below 2250 ohms,
and the compressor will run with the control circuit by-
1 2 3 passed, but will not run when connected properly, the solid-
state module is defective and should be replaced. The re-
LEGEND
placement module must have the same supply voltage rating
1 — Kriwan Motor Protection Module Power as the original module.
2 — Kriwan Control Circuit Connections
3 — Motor Thermal Sensor CoreSense Replacement of Kriwan Motor Protection Mod-
ule — The Kriwan module has been replaced by the Core-
Fig. 50 — Kriwan Motor Protection Wiring Sense communication module for motor protection. Minor
wiring changes are required as described below.
1. De-energize control circuit and module power. Remove the
control circuit wires from the module (terminals M1 and WARNING
M2). Connect a jumper across these control circuit wires.
This will bypass the control contact of the module. Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off
all power to this equipment during installation and service.
CAUTION There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all dis-
connect locations to alert others not to restore power until
The motor protection system within the compressor is now work is completed.
bypassed. Use this configuration to temporarily test module
only.
2. Re-energize the control circuit and module power. If the WARNING
compressor will not operate with the jumper installed, then
the problem is external to the solid-state protection system. If Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed.
the compressor operates with the module bypassed but will Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, resulting in
not operate when the module is reconnected, then the control personal injury or death.
circuit relay in the module is open. Remove the temporary Removing the Kriwan motor protection module:
jumper installed in Step 1.
1. Disconnect and lock out the high voltage and control voltage
3. The thermistor protection chain now needs to be tested to de- supply to the unit.
termine if the module’s control circuit relay is open due to
excessive internal temperatures or a faulty component. 2. Using a straight blade screwdriver, carefully depress the tabs
Check the thermistor protection chain located in the holding the terminal cover to the terminal box to remove the
compressor as follows: terminal cover. Before proceeding, use a volt meter to verify
that the power has been disconnected from the unit.
a. De-energize control circuit and module power.
3. Using wire markers, label the M1, M2, T1, and T2 wires that
b. Remove the sensor leads from the module (S1 and are connected to the Kriwan module. Using needle nose pli-
S2). ers, remove the M1, M2, T1, T2, S1 and S2 wires from the
c. Measure the resistance of the thermistor protection Kriwan motor protector module.
chain through these sensor leads with an ohm meter. 4. Gently bend the holding tabs holding the Kriwan module in
the terminal box and remove the Kriwan module from the
terminal box. See Fig. 51.
5. Take note of the S1-S2 plug orientation on the compressor
thermistor fusite. Remove the S1-S2 wire harness and plug
from the compressor.
67
place. Route the thermistor wire harness as shown and plug
the harness into the 2x2 socket on the CoreSense module.
4. Connect the previously labeled M1, M2, T1, and T2 wires to
HOLDING
the appropriate terminals on the CoreSense module.
TAB 5. Connect the L1, L2, and L3 phase sensing wires to the L1,
L2, and L3 compressor terminal block connections. See the
compressor terminal cover diagram for identification of the
L1, L2, and L3 terminal block connections.
6. Double-check the installation and make sure all connections
are secure. Install the compressor terminal cover.
The CoreSense retrofit is complete and the system can be put
back into service.
HOLDING
TAB
a38-7310
RED
Fig. 51 — Kriwan Motor Protection Module
Removal BLACK
Installing the CoreSense communications module:

WHITE
1. A new S1-S2 thermistor wiring harness is shipped with the
CoreSense kit and must be used. The wiring harness connec- HOLDING
TAB
tor block should be fully inserted on the three pins in the ori-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T2 T1 L1 L2 L3
THERMISTOR WIRE
entation shown in Fig. 52 for proper operation.
M1/M2
HARNESS PLUGGED
BLACK INTO 2X2 SOCKET
WHITE
A38-7313
BLUE HOLDING
VIOLET
TAB
Fig. 54 — CoreSense Communication Module

INSTALL IN THIS Mounting
ORIENTATION
CoreSense Communications Module Troubleshooting — Cope-

land models with a "TE" in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-
TED) have a motor overload system that consists of an external
CoreSense communication electronic control module.
Motor thermistors are connected to the CoreSense communica-
tion module via a 2x2 plug (Fig. 55).
MOTOR SCROLL
PTC NTC CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT (NOT USED)
FOR FUTURE COMMON

USE CONNECTION
A38-7311
a38-7308
Fig. 55 — CoreSense Communications
Motor Thermistor Plug
Fig. 52 — Compressor Motor Sensor Harness
Installation (under motor protection module) The CoreSense communications module has field configurable
DIP switches for addressing and configuring the module. The DIP
2. Review the DIP switch settings on the CoreSense module. switches should be addressed as shown in Table 59.
DIP switch no. 1 should be ON (up position) and all other The CoreSense communication module has a green and a red
DIP switches should be OFF (down position). See Fig. 53. light-emitting diode (LED). A solid green LED indicates the mod-
ule is powered and operation is normal. A solid red LED indicates
an internal problem with the module. If a solid red LED is encoun-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 tered, power down the module (interrupt the T1-T2 power) for 30
O ON
F
seconds to reboot the module. If a solid red LED is persistent,
F change the CoreSense module.
The CoreSense module communicates warning codes via a
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF green flashing LED. Warning codes do not result in a trip or lock-
out condition. Alert codes are communicated via a red flashing
ROCKER DOWN A38-7812
LED. Alert codes will result in a trip condition and possibly a
Fig. 53 — CoreSense Communication DIP lockout condition. See wiring diagram on terminal box cover, or
Switch Settings for Kriwan Retrofit Fig. 56. The flash code corresponds to the number of LED flashes,
followed by a pause, and then the flash code is repeated. A lockout
condition produces a red flash, followed by a pause, a solid red, a
3. Install the CoreSense module in the compressor terminal box second pause, and then repeated. Table 60 lists the flash code in-
as shown in Fig. 54, with the tabs holding the module in formation for Warning and Alert codes along with code reset and
troubleshooting information.
68
LEDS
Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts
will close if the resistance of the motor PTC circuit is back
DIP SWITCHES MOTOR THERMAL in the normal range. The module will lock out the compres-
R
SENSORS sor if the trip condition exists for longer than 6 hours. Once
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle
G JUMPER
will be required to clear the lockout.
COMMUNICATION
• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the red Alert
PORT LED 3 times indicating the compressor is locked out due to
short cycling. A Code 3 Alert will open the M2-M1 con-
tacts. Code 3 will be enabled when the Short Cycling DIP
M2 M1 switch (no. 10) is ON (in the up position) and the compres-
T2 T1 L1 L2 L3 sor has exceeded the number of short cycles configured by
CONTROL CIRCUIT
CONNECTIONS
the user in a 24-hour period. Once the module has locked
out the compressor, a power cycle will be required to clear
the lockout.
• Code 4 – Scroll High Temperature: The module will flash
MODULE
POWER
COMPRESSOR PHASE the red Alert LED 4 times indicating the scroll NTC circuit
SENSING A38-7314
is less than 2400 . A Code 4 Alert will open the M2-M1
contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-
Fig. 56 — CoreSense Communication Motor M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the scroll NTC
Protection Wiring circuit is higher than 5100 . The module will lock out the
compressor if the number of Code 4 Alerts exceeds the user
Warning Codes (Green LED Flash Code): configurable number of Code 4 events within a 24-hour
• Code 1 – Loss of Communication: The module will flash period. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a
the green Warning LED one time indicating the module has power cycle will be required to clear the lockout.
not communicated with the master controller for longer than • Code 5 – Not used.
5 minutes. Once communication is re-initiated, the Warning • Code 6 – Missing Phase: The module will flash the red
will be cleared. The 30MP units do not support the commu- Alert LED 6 times indicating a missing phase in one of the
nication capability of this module. three leads to the compressor. A Code 6 Alert will open the
• Code 2 – Reserved For Future Use M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and
• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the green the M2-M1 contacts will close if the missing phase condi-
Warning LED three times indicating the compressor has tion is not present. The module will lock out the compressor
short cycled more than 48 times in 24 hours. A short cycle is after 10 consecutive Code 6 Alerts. Once the module has
defined as compressor runtime of less than 1 minute. The locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be required to
Warning will be activated when the “Short Cycling” DIP clear the lockout.
Switch (no. 10) is OFF (in the down position). When fewer • Code 7 – Reverse Phase: The module will flash the red
than 48 short cycles are accumulated in 24 hours the Warn- Alert LED 7 times indicating a reverse phase in two of the
ing code will be cleared. three leads to the compressor. A Code 7 Alert will open the
• Code 4 – Open/Shorted Scroll Thermistor: The module will M2-M1 contacts. The module will lock out the compressor
flash the green Warning LED four times, indicating that the after one Code 7 Alert. A power cycle will be required to
scroll NTC thermistor has a resistance value that indicates clear the lockout.
an open/shorted thermistor. The Warning will be cleared • Code 8 – Not used.
when the resistance value is in the normal range. The 30MP • Code 9 – Module Low Voltage: The module will flash the
units do not utilize a scroll thermistor. red Alert LED 9 times indicating low module voltage, less
• Code 5 – Not used than 18 vac on the T2-T1 terminals for more than 5 seconds.
Alert/Lockout Codes (Red LED Flash Code): A Code 9 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert
• Code 1 – Motor High Temperature: The module will flash will reset after 5 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close
the red Alert LED one time indicating the motor PTC circuit if the T2-T1 voltage is above the reset value in 18 to 30 vac.
has exceeded 4500 . A Code 1 Alert will open the M2-M1 Resetting Alert codes can be accomplished manually by cy-
contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2- cling power to the module (disconnect T2 or T1 for 5 seconds). If
M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the motor PTC the fault that initiated the Alert code is absent after the reset is per-
circuit is below 2750 . Five consecutive Code 1 Alerts will formed, the Alert code will be cleared and CoreSense module will
lock out the compressor. Once the module has locked out allow normal operation. If the fault is still present after the reset is
the compressor, a power cycle will be required for the lock- performed, the fault code will continue to be displayed via the
out to be cleared. green or red flashing LED.
• Code 2 – Open/Shorted Motor Thermistor: The module will
flash the red Alert LED 2 times indicating the motor PTC Troubleshooting procedures described for the Kriwan module
thermistor circuit has a resistance value greater than 220  section (page 66) are applicable to the CoreSense communication
or less than 100 . that indicates an open/shorted thermistor module.
chain. A Code 2 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The
69
Table 59 — CoreSense Communication Module DIP Switch Settings
COPELAND DIP SWITCH
ELECTRICAL
CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TE ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
TW* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
*Settings for Kriwan retrofit. See “CoreSense Replacement of Kriwan
Motor Protection Module” on page 67.
Table 60 — CoreSense Communication Module LED Flash Codes
FAULT CODE TROUBLESHOOTING
LED STATUS FAULT CONDITION FAULT CODE RESET
DESCRIPTION INFORMATION
None, normal operation Module is powered and Not applicable None
SOLID GREEN under normal operation
Module malfunction Module has an internal fault Not applicable 1. Reset module by removing
SOLID RED power from T1-T2.
2. Replace module.
WARNING LED FLASH
Loss of communication Module and Master Control- Automatic when communi- Not Supported. Check DIP
ler have lost communica- cations are re-established Switch settings.
GREEN FLASH CODE 1
tions with each other for
more than 5 minutes
GREEN FLASH CODE 2 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min- Fewer than 48 short cycles 30MP controls do not allow
ute. Number of short cycles in 24 hours this operation normally. Con-
GREEN FLASH CODE 3 exceeds 48 in a 24-hour firm proper wiring and DIP
period. switch settings.
Open/Shorted Scroll Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
GREEN FLASH CODE 4 Thermistor
GREEN FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
ALERT/LOCKOUT LED FLASH
High motor temperature Thermistor resistance Thermistor resistance less 1. Check power supply.
greater than 4500 . Lock- than 2750  and 30 min- 2. Check system charge and
RED FLASH CODE 1 out occurs after 5 alerts. utes have elapsed superheat.
3. Check compressor
contactor.
Open/shorted motor Thermistor resistance Thermistor resistance is 1. Check for poor connec-
thermistor greater than 4500 , or less between 100 and 2750  tions at module and therm-
than 100 . Lockout occurs and 30 minutes have istor fusite.
RED FLASH CODE 2 after 6 hours. elapsed 2. Check continuity of therm-
istor wiring harness.
3. Check for an open thermis-
tor circuit.
Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min- Interrupt power to T2-T1 30MP controls do not allow
ute. Lockout if the number this operation normally. Con-
RED FLASH CODE 3 of alerts exceeds the num- firm proper wiring.
ber configured by the user
in 24 hours.
RED FLASH CODE 4 Scroll high temperature Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
RED FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Missing phase Missing phase detected. After 5 minutes and miss- 1. Check incoming power.
Lockout after 10 consecu- ing phase condition is not 2. Check fuses or circuit
RED FLASH CODE 6 tive alerts. present breakers.
3. Check compressor contac-
tor.
Reverse phase Reverse phase detected. Interrupt power to T2-T1 1. Check incoming power
Lockout after 1 alert. phase sequence.
2. Check compressor contac-
RED FLASH CODE 7
tor.
3. Check module phase wir-
ing A-B-C.
RED FLASH CODE 8 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Module low voltage Less than 18 vac supplied After 5 minutes and voltage This alert does not result in a
to module is between 18 and 30 vac lockout fault.
RED FLASH CODE 9 1. Verify correct 24 vac mod-
ule is installed.
2. Check for a wiring error.
70
BITZER1 PROTECTION MODULE — The 30MP unit sizes 2. Check the thermistor protection chain located in the com-
050-071 use Bitzer compressors, which are equipped with 24V pressor as follows:
Lodam motor protection modules. See Fig. 38. The module opens a. De-energize control circuit and module power.
the relay contact in the control circuit and locks out immediately if
the motor temperature exceeds the preset limit. If a lockout occurs b. Remove the sensor leads from the module (S1 and S2
the compressor must cool to ambient temperature and the unit or 11 and 14). Measure the resistance of the thermis-
alarm must be cleared manually before the compressor will restart. tor protection chain through these sensor leads with
an ohmmeter.
CAUTION IMPORTANT: Use an ohmmeter with a maximum of 9
Do not apply external voltage to orange instrument leads, even volts to check the sensor chain. The sensor chain is sensi-
for test purposes. Damage to the Lodam protection device tive and easily damaged; no attempt should be made to
may result. check continuity through it with anything other than an
ohmmeter. The application of any external voltage to the
sensor chain may cause damage requiring the replacement
of the compressor.
The diagnosis of this resistance reading is as follows:
• 200 to 2250 ohms - Normal operating range
• 2750 ohms or greater - Compressor overheated -
Allow time to cool
• Zero resistance - Shorted sensor circuit - Replace the
compressor
• Infinite resistance - Open sensor circuit - Replace the
compressor
Motor Protector PTC Key Values
Normal PTC resistance: 250 to 2250 Ohms
Trip resistance: >4500 Ohm ± 20%
Reset resistance: <2750 Ohm ± 20%
If the resistance reading is abnormal, remove the sensor con-
nector plug from the compressor and measure the resistance
at the sensor fusite pins. This will determine if the abnormal
reading was due to a faulty connector. On initial start-up, and
Fig. 57 — External Motor Protection Module, after any module trip, the resistance of the sensor chain must
30MP050-071 Units be below the module reset point before the module circuit
will close. Reset values are 2250 to 3000 ohms.
FIELD TROUBLESHOOTING SOLID-STATE MOTOR 3. If the sensor chain has a resistance that is below 2250 ohms,
PROTECTION MODULE — Follow the steps listed below to and the compressor will run with the control circuit by-
troubleshoot the module in the field. See wiring diagram in Fig. 3 passed, but will not run when connected properly, the solid-
and Fig. 4 or in terminal box cover. state module is defective and should be replaced. The re-
1. De-energize control circuit and module power. Remove the placement module must have the same supply voltage rating
control circuit wires from the module (Terminals M1 and as the original module.
M2 or 11 and 14). Connect a jumper across these “control Alarms and Alerts
circuit” wires. This will bypass the “control contact” of the
module. These are warnings of abnormal or fault conditions, and may
cause either one circuit or the whole unit to shut down. They are
Re-energize the control circuit and module power. If the assigned code numbers as described in Table 61.
compressor will not operate with the jumper installed, then
the problem is external to the solid-state protection system. Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if the
condition corrects itself. The following method must be used to re-
If the compressor operates with the module bypassed but set manual alarms:
will not operate when the module is reconnected, then the
control circuit relay in the module is open. The thermistor Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the
protection chain now needs to be tested to determine if the alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the LED
module’s control circuit relay is open due to excessive inter- on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press ENTER and
nal temperatures or a faulty component. until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET ALL CURRENT
ALARMS” is displayed. Press ENTER . The control will prompt
CAUTION the user for a password, by displaying PASS and WORD. Press
The motor protection system within the compressor is now ENTER to display the default password, 1111. Press ENTER for
bypassed. Use this configuration to temporarily test module each character. If the password has been changed, use the arrow
only. Failure to do this may result in unit damage. keys to change each individual character. Toggle the display to
“YES” and press ENTER . The alarms will be reset.
1. Bitzer is a registered trademark of Bitzer Kuhlmaschinebrau GmbH.
71
Table 61 — Alarm and Alert Codes
ALARM/ ALARM WHY WAS THIS
ACTION TAKEN RESET PROBABLE
ALERT OR DESCRIPTION ALARM
BY CONTROL METHOD CAUSE
CODE ALERT GENERATED?
Circuit A Compressor Two compressors on circuit See applicable compressor
A048 Alarm Circuit shut down Manual
Availability Alarm failed alarm.
High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
Circuit A, Compressor 1 Compressor feedback signal Compressor A1 shut flow, filter drier plugged, non-
T051 Alert Manual
Failure does not match relay state down condensables, operation
beyond capability, motor pro-
tection module open.
Respective current sensor All compressor outputs
Welded contactor, welded
Circuit A, Compressor 1 board (CSB) feedback signal de-energized. 30MPA
A051 Alarm Manual control relay on MBB, wiring
Stuck on Failure is ON when the compressor head pressure routine
should be off remains active error, faulty CSB.

T052 Alert Manual
Respective current sensor All compressor outputs
Welded contactor, welded
Circuit A, Compressor 2 board (CSB) feedback signal de-energized. 30MPA
A052 Alarm Manual control relay on MBB, wiring
error, faulty CSB.
should be off remains active
T053 Alert Failure does not match relay state down Manual
condensables, operation
Respective current sensor All compressor outputs Welded contactor, welded
A053 Alarm Circuit A, Compressor 3 board (CSB) feedback signal de-energized. 30MPA
Stuck on Failure is ON when the compressor Manual control relay on MBB, wiring
head pressure routine
error, faulty CSB.
T055 Alert Circuit B, Compressor 1 Compressor feedback signal Compressor B1 shut Manual flow, filter drier plugged, non-
Respective current sensor All compressor outputs Welded contactor, welded
A055 Alarm Circuit B, Compressor 1 board (CSB) feedback signal de-energized. 30MPA Manual control relay on MBB, wiring
error, faulty CSB.
Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor outside range of Chiller shut down Thermistor failure, damaged
A060 Alarm Automatic
Thermistor Failure –40 to 245°F (–40 to118°C) immediately cable/wire or wiring error.
Cooler Entering Fluid Thermistor outside range of Chiller shut down Thermistor failure, damaged
Thermistor Failure –40 to 245°F (–40 to118°C) immediately cable/wire or wiring error.
Condenser Leaving Fluid Thermistor outside range of Alert only Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged
T062 Alert Thermistor Failure –40 to 245°F (–40 to118°C) No action taken cable/wire or wiring error.
Condenser Entering Fluid Thermistor outside range of Alert only Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged
T063 Alert
Thermistor Failure –40 to 245°F (–40 to118°C) No action taken cable/wire or wiring error.
If return gas sensors are
Circuit A Return Gas enabled (RG.EN) and Thermistor failure, damaged
T068 None Circuit A shut down Automatic
Thermistor Failure thermistor is outside range of cable/wire or wiring error.
–40 to 245°F (–40 to 118°C)
If return gas sensors are
Circuit B Return Gas enabled (RG.EN) and Thermistor failure, damaged
T069 None Thermistor Failure thermistor is outside range of Circuit B shut down Automatic cable/wire or wiring error.
–40 to 245°F (–40 to 118°C)
Temperature reset
Outside Air Thermistor Thermistor outside range of disabled. Chiller runs Thermistor failure, damaged
T073 Alert –40 to 245°F (–40 to 118°C) Automatic
Failure (if enabled) under normal control/set cable/wire or wiring error.
points
Temperature reset
Space Temperature/Dual Chiller Thermistor outside range of disabled. Chiller runs Thermistor failure, damaged
T074 Alert –40 to 245°F (–40 to 118°C) Automatic
Thermistor Failure under normal control/set cable/wire or wiring error.
(if enabled)
points
Circuit A Saturated
Faulty expansion valve, Faulty expansion valve
Suction Temperature
A077 Alarm exceeds Cooler Leaving suction pressure transducer Circuit A shut down Manual suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid thermistor. or leaving fluid thermistor.
Fluid Temperature
Circuit B Saturated
Faulty expansion valve, Faulty expansion valve
Suction Temperature
A078 Alarm suction pressure transducer Circuit B shut down Manual suction pressure transducer
exceeds Cooler Leaving or leaving fluid thermistor. or leaving fluid thermistor.
Fluid Temperature
Dual LWT thermistor failure,
Lead/Lag LWT Thermistor outside range of Chiller runs as a stand
T079 Alert Automatic damaged cable/wire or
Thermistor Failure –40 to 245°F (–40 to 118°C) alone machine
wiring error.
Transducer failure, poor
Circuit A Discharge Outside of range (0 to
A090 Alarm Circuit A shut down Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
Pressure Transducer Failure 667 psig)
damage/error.
Transducer failure, poor
Circuit B Discharge Outside of range (0 to
A091 Alarm Circuit B shut down Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
Pressure Transducer Failure 667 psig) damage/error.
72
Table 61 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
Circuit A Suction Transducer failure, poor
Outside of range (0 to 420
A092 Alarm Pressure Transducer Fail- psig) Circuit A shut down Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
ure damage/error.
Circuit B Suction Transducer failure, poor
Outside of range (0 to 420
A093 Alarm Pressure Transducer Fail- Circuit B shut down Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
psig)
ure damage/error.
Discharge thermistor (DTT)
Discharge Gas is either open or shorted out- Digital compressor shut Thermistor failure, damaged
T094 Alert Automatic
Thermistor Failure side of range –39.9 to 356°F down cable/wire or wiring error.
(–39.9 to 180°C)
If the compressors are off
and discharge pressure Circuit not allowed to Refrigerant leak or trans-
A110 Alarm Circuit A Loss of Charge Manual
reading is < 26 psig for start ducer failure.
30 sec.
If the compressors are off
A111 Alarm Circuit B Loss of Charge and discharge pressure Circuit not allowed to Manual Refrigerant leak or
reading is < 26 psig for start transducer failure.
30 sec.
Circuit saturated suction Faulty expansion valve,
Circuit A High Saturated temperature pressure faulty suction pressure
A112 Alarm Suction Temperature transducer > 70°F (21.1°C) Circuit shut down Manual transducer or high entering
for 5 minutes fluid temperature.
Circuit saturated suction Faulty Expansion valve,
Circuit B High Saturated
temperature pressure faulty suction pressure trans-
A113 Alarm Suction Temperature Circuit shut down Manual
transducer > 70°F (21.1°C) ducer or high entering fluid
for 5 minutes temperature.
Automatic restart Faulty expansion valve,
Suction superheat is after first daily faulty suction pressure
Circuit A Low Suction
A114 Alarm Superheat less than 5°F (2.8°C) for 5 Circuit A shut down occurrence. transducer, faulty suction gas
minutes. (if RGT installed) Manual restart thermistor, circuit
thereafter. overcharged.
Automatic restart Faulty expansion valve,
Suction superheat is after first daily faulty suction pressure
Circuit B Low Suction
A115 Alarm less than 5°F (2.8°C) for 5 Circuit B shut down occurrence. transducer, faulty suction gas
Superheat minutes. (if RGT installed) Manual restart thermistor, circuit
thereafter. overcharged.
Mode 7 caused the com- Faulty expansion valve, low
pressor to unload 3 consecu- refrigerant charge, plugged
Circuit A Low Cooler
A116 Alarm tive times with less than a Circuit shut down Manual filter drier, faulty suction
Suction Temperature 30-minute interval between pressure transducer, low
each circuit shutdown. cooler fluid flow.
Mode 7 caused the com- Faulty expansion valve, low
Circuit B Low Cooler pressor to unload 3 consecu- refrigerant charge, plugged
A117 Alarm Suction Temperature tive times with less than a Circuit shut down Manual filter drier, faulty suction
30-minute interval between pressure transducer, low
each circuit shutdown. cooler fluid flow.
Digital compressor enabled This is a non-broadcast Automatic, when
discharge tempera- Circuit
High Discharge Gas Tem- (A1.TY) and discharge gas overcharged, faulty
P118 Pre-Alert alarm
discharge temperature
perature temperature greater than Compressor A1 is shut ture is less than
268°F (131.1°C) down thermistor.
250°F (121.1°C).
Digital compressor enabled
Circuit overcharged, faulty
High Discharge Gas Tem- (A1.TY) and discharge gas Compressor A1 is shut
T118 Alert Manual discharge temperature
perature temperature greater than down
thermistor.
268°F (131.1°C)
High Pressure Switch High Pressure A Switch Faulty transducer/high
Trip Circuit A Input open to MBB pressure switch.
High Pressure Switch High Pressure B Switch Faulty transducer/high
Trip Circuit B Input open to MBB pressure switch.
Plugged filter drier unit oper-
Automatic, only ating outside of range. Faulty
after first 3 daily
SCT >Maximum condensing occurrences.
transducer/high pressure
temperature from operating switch overcharged, low/
A126 Alarm Circuit A High envelope Circuit shut down Manual reset restricted condenser
Head Pressure thereafter. SCT
Operation outside compres- airflow (30MPA) low or loss of
must drop 5°F
sor operating envelope condenser flow (30MPW),
(2.8°C) before fouled condenser (30MPW),
restart
faulty EXV.
Plugged filter drier unit oper-
Automatic, only
ating outside of range. Faulty
after first 3 daily
SCT >Maximum condensing transducer/high pressure
occurrences.
temperature from operating switch overcharged, low/
Circuit B High Manual reset
A127 Alarm envelope Circuit shut down restricted condenser
Head Pressure Operation outside compres-
thereafter. SCT airflow (30MPA) low or loss of
must drop 5°F
sor operating envelope (2.8°C) before
condenser flow (30MPW),
fouled condenser (30MPW),
restart faulty EXV.
Faulty or plugged TXV or
Automatic EXV, low refrigerant charge,
Suction pressure below restart after first
Circuit A Low Suction TXV out of adjustment, liquid
A133 Alarm 34 psig for 8 seconds or Circuit shut down daily occurrence.
Pressure line valve partially closed.
below 23 psig Manual restart Plugged filter drier. Low
thereafter cooler flow.
73
Automatic
Circuit B Low Suction Suction pressure below restart after first Faulty or sticking EXV,
A134 Alarm 34 psig for 8 seconds or Circuit shut down daily occurrence. low refrigerant charge,
Pressure
below 23 psig Manual restart plugged filter drier.
thereafter
Manual once
A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration One or more illegal Chiller is not allowed to configuration errors Configuration error.
configurations exists. start Check unit settings.
are corrected
Automatic once
alarms/alerts are Alarm notifies user
Unit Down Due to Both circuits are down due Chiller is unable
A152 Alarm cleared that prevent that chiller is 100%
Failure to alarms/alerts. to run
the chiller from down.
starting
Occupancy schedule
Automatic when Time/Date/Month/
Real Time Clock will not be used. Chiller
T153 Alert Hardware Failure Internal clock on MBB fails defaults to Local On correct clock control Day/Year not
restarts properly set.
mode
Serial EEPROM Chiller is unable Main Base Board
A154 Alarm Hardware failure with MBB Manual
Hardware Failure to run failure.
Potential failure of
MBB. Download
T155 Alert Serial EEPROM Configuration/storage No Action Manual current operating
Storage Failure failure with MBB software. Replace
MBB if error occurs
again.
A156 Alarm Critical Serial EEPROM Configuration/storage Chiller is not allowed Main Base Board
Manual
Storage Failure failure with MBB to run failure.
Hardware failure with Chiller is not allowed Main Base Board
A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure Manual
peripheral device to run failure.
Loss of Communication MBB loses communication Chiller is not allowed Wiring error, faulty
A172 Alarm with EXV board with EXV board to run Automatic wiring or failed
EXV board.
4 to 20 mA
temperature reset Wiring error, faulty
Loss of Communication MBB loses communication disabled. Demand wiring or failed
with EMM with EMM Limit set to 100%. 4 to Energy Management
20 mA set point Module (EMM).
disabled
If configured with EMM and Set point function Faulty signal
4 to 20 mA Cooling Set
T174 Alert input less than 2 mA or disabled. Chiller Automatic generator, wiring
Point Input Failure
greater than 22 mA controls to CSP1 error, or faulty EMM.
Wiring error, faulty wir-
Loss of Communication MBB loses communication Chiller is not allowed to ing or failed
with the AUX Board with AUX Board. run AUX board, incorrect
configuration.
Reset function
4 to 20 mA If configured with EMM Faulty signal
T176 Alert Temperature Reset and input less than 2 mA or disabled. Chiller
Automatic generator, wiring
Input Failure greater than 22 mA returns to normal set
point control error, or faulty EMM.
Demand limit function

If configured with EMM and disabled. Chiller Faulty signal
4 to 20 mA Demand
T177 Alert Limit Input Failure input less than 2 mA or returns to 100% Automatic generator, wiring
greater than 22 mA demand limit error, or faulty EMM.
control
Cooler flow switch contacts
failed to close within
Coder Flow/Interlock Con- 1 minute (if cooler pump No chilled water flow.
P200 Pre-Alert Chiller not allowed to
tacts Failed to Close at control is enabled) or
start
Manual Faulty flow switch or
Start-Up within 5 minutes (if cooler interlock. Wiring error.
pump control is not
enabled) after start-up
Cooler flow switch contacts
failed to close within
Cooler Flow/Interlock 1 minute (if cooler pump
Chiller not allowed to
No chilled water flow.
T200 Alert Contacts failed to Close control is enabled) or Manual Faulty flow switch or
start
at start-up within 5 minutes (if cooler interlock. Wiring error.
pump control is not
enabled) after start-up
Cooler Flow/Interlock
Flow switch opens for at Cooler pump failure,
Contacts Opened All compressors shut
P201 Pre-Alert least 3 seconds after Manual faulty flow switch or
During Normal being initially closed down interlock. Wiring error.
Operation
Cooler Flow/Interlock
Flow switch opens for at Cooler pump failure,
A201 Alarm Contacts Opened All compressors shut
During Normal least 3 seconds after down Manual faulty flow switch or
being initially closed interlock. Wiring error.
Operation
If configured for cooler
Cooler Pump Interlock pump control and flow Wiring error, faulty
Chiller not allowed to Automatic when
A202 Alarm Closed When Pump is switch input is closed for pump contactor
Off 5 minutes while pump start aux contacts open
(welded contacts).
output(s) are off
74
Wiring error, faulty
Dual chiller control wiring, failed Slave
Master chiller MBB
Loss of Communication disabled. Chiller runs chiller MBB module,
T203 Alert loses communication Automatic
with slave chiller as a stand-alone power loss at slave
with slave chiller MBB
machine chiller, wrong slave
address.
Wiring error, faulty
Dual chiller control
Slave chiller MBB loses wiring, failed master
Loss of Communication disabled. Chiller runs
T204 Alert communication with Automatic chiller MBB module,
with master chiller as a stand-alone
master chiller MBB machine
power loss at Master
chiller.
CCN Address for
both chillers is the
Dual chiller routine same. Must be
Master and slave chiller
Master and slave chiller disabled. Master/slave different. Check
T205 Alert have the same CCN Automatic
with same address run as stand-alone CCN.A under the
address (CCN.A)
chillers OPT2 sub-mode in
Configuration at both
chillers.
LWT read is greater than Building load greater

LCW Alert Limit, Total than unit capacity,
High Leaving Chilled Alert only. No action low water/brine flow
T206 Alert capacity is 100% and LWT Automatic
Water Temperature taken or compressor fault.
is greater than LWT
Check for other
reading one minute ago
alarms/alerts.
Chiller shut down Both EWT and LWT
without going through
must be at least 6 F
Cooler Freeze Cooler EWT or LWT is less pumpdown. Cooler (3.3 C) above Brine
Faulty thermistor
A207 Alarm Protection than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ) pump continues to Freeze point (BR.FZ). (T1/T2),
low water
run a minimum of flow.
Automatic for first, Man-
5 minutes (if control ual reset there after
enabled)
Cooler EWT is less than
Chiller shut down. Reverse flow faulty
EWT or LWT LWT by 3°F (1.7°C) for
A208 Alarm Cooler pump shut off Manual thermistor, miswired
Thermistor failure 1 minute after a circuit is
(if control enabled) thermistor.
started
A220 Alarm Condenser Pump If configured for condenser Condenser and cooler Manual Failure of condenser
Interlock Failure to Close pump interlock pumps shut off. pump or controls.
at Start-Up and the flow switch Chiller shut down Wiring error.
input fails to close with-
in 5 minutes after start-
up. Also valid when
configured for con-
denser pump control
P221 Pre-Alert Condenser Pump If configured for con- Condenser and cooler Manual Failure of condenser
Interlock Opened During denser pump interlock pumps shut off. Chiller pump or controls.
Normal Operation and the flow switch shut down Wiring error.
opens for 15 seconds
during normal
operation (or when
the condenser pump
relay is on when con-
denser pump control
is configured)
Faulty or plugged TXV
Automatic or EXV, low refrigerant
Suction pressure below restart after first charge, TXV out of
A134 Alarm Circuit B Low Suction 34 psig for 8 seconds or Circuit shut down daily occurrence. adjustment, liquid
Pressure
below 23 psig Manual restart line valve partially
thereafter closed. Plugged filter
drier. Low cooler flow.
Reverse any two incom-
A140 Alert Reverse Rotation Detected Incoming chiller power leads Chiller not allowed to start Manual ing power leads to cor-
not phased correctly rect. Check for correct
fan rotation first.
Automatic once CCN
CCN emergency stop command for CCN Network
A150 Alarm Emergency Stop Chiller shut down
command received EMSTOP returns to command.
normal
Manual once
One or more illegal Chiller is not allowed to Configuration error.
A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration configuration errors
configurations exists start are corrected Check unit settings.
Automatic once
alarms/alerts are Alarm notifies user
A152 Alarm Unit Down Due to Both circuits are down due Chiller is unable cleared that prevent the
Failure to alarms/alerts to run that chiller is 100%
chiller from down.
starting
Occupancy schedule
Automatic when Time/Date/Month/
Real Time Clock will not be used. Chiller
T153 Alert Internal clock on MBB fails correct clock control Day/Year not
Hardware Failure defaults to Local On restarts properly set.
mode
A154 Alarm Serial EEPROM Hardware failure with MBB Chiller is unable Manual Main Base Board
Hardware Failure to run failure.
75
Potential failure of
MBB. Download
Serial EEPROM Configuration/storage current operating
T155 Alert No Action Manual
Storage Failure failure with MBB software. Replace
MBB if error occurs
again.
Critical Serial EEPROM Configuration/storage Chiller is not allowed Main Base Board
A156 Alarm Manual
Storage Failure failure with MBB to run failure.
Hardware failure with Chiller is not allowed Main Base Board
A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure Manual
peripheral device to run failure.
Loss of Communication MBB loses communication Chiller is not allowed Wiring error, faulty wir-
with EXV Board with EXV board to run ing or failed EXV board.
4 to 20 mA
temperature reset Wiring error, faulty
Loss of Communication MBB loses communication disabled. Demand wiring or failed
with EMM with EMM Limit set to 100%. 4 to Energy Management
20 mA set point Module (EMM).
disabled
If configured with EMM and Set point function Faulty signal
4 to 20 mA Cooling Set
T174 Alert input less than 2 mA or disabled. Chiller Automatic generator, wiring
Point Input Failure
greater than 22 mA controls to CSP1 error, or faulty EMM.
Wiring error, faulty wir-
Loss of Communication MBB losses communication ing, failed AUX board,
A175 Alarm Digital control is disabled. Automatic ditital option enabled,
with AUX Board with AUX board
Configura-
tion→Unit→AI.TY=YES
Reset function
4 to 20 mA If configured with EMM Faulty signal
disabled. Chiller
T176 Alert Temperature Reset and input less than 2 mA or Automatic generator, wiring
Input Failure greater than 22 mA returns to normal set error, or faulty EMM.
point control
A221 Alarm Condenser Pump If configured for con- Condenser and cooler Manual Failure of condenser
Interlock Opened During denser pump interlock pumps shut off. Chiller pump or controls.
Normal Operation and the flow switch shut down Wiring error.
opens for 15 seconds
during normal
operation (or when
the condenser pump
relay is on when con-
denser pump control
is configured)
A222 Alarm Condenser Pump If configured for con- Chiller is not allowed to Manual Failure of condenser
Interlock Closed When denser pump interlock start pump relays or inter-
Pump is Off condenser pump con- locks, welded
trol, and the flow contacts.
switch is closed
when pump relay is off
Strainer Service
Countdown (S.T.DN)
Strainer Blowdown Routine strainer
T302 Alert Scheduled expired. Complete strainer
None Automatic maintenance
Maintenance Due blowdown and enter 'YES' for
Strainer Maintenance Done required.
(S.T.MN) item
Current Sensor Board Alert occurs when CSB output Compressor A1 shut CSB failure.
A1 Failure is a constant high value down
T501 Alert Current Sensor Board Alert occurs when CSB output Compressor A2 shut Automatic CSB failure.
Current Sensor Board Alert occurs when CSB output Compressor A3 shut CSB failure.
Current Sensor Board Alert occurs when CSB output Compressor B1 shut CSB failure.
B1 Failure is a constant high value down
T950 Alert Loss of Communication No communications have WSM forces removed. Automatic Failed module, wiring
with Water System been received by the MBB Chiller runs under own error, failed
Manager within 5 minutes of last control transformer, loose
transmission connection plug,
wrong address.
A951 Alarm Loss of Communication No communications have CSM forces removed. Automatic Failed module, wiring
with Chillervisor System been received by the MBB Chiller runs under own error, failed
Manager within 5 minutes of last control transformer, loose
transmission connection plug,
wrong address.
LEGEND
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network
CSB — Current Sensor Board
CSM — Chiller System Manager
EEPROM — Electronic Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMM — Energy Management Module
EWT — Entering Fluid Temperature
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
LCW — Leaving Chilled Water
LWT — Leaving Fluid Temperature
MBB — Main Base Board
RGT — Return Gas Temperature
SCT — Saturated Condenser Temperature
TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve
WSM — Water System Manager
76
COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS To check out alerts T051-T053:
A048 (Circuit A Compressor Availability Alarm) — This alarm 1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test mode.
occurs when two compressors are unavailable to run on a 3-com- If the compressor does not start, then most likely the problem
pressor circuit. The control ensures proper oil return by ensuring a is one of the following: HPS open, open internal protection,
circuit does not operate with one compressor for longer than one circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wiring, incorrect com-
hour of cumulative run time. pressor wiring or incorrect Copeland CoreSense internal
Circuit B Alarms Reset — Table 62 shows circuit B compressor phase monitor wiring.
Alarms, the associated display text, and the reset type to preform 2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the correct
to reset the alarm. direction.
.
Table 62 — Circuit B Compressor Alarm Reset

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction
ALARM/
DISPLAY TEXT
RESET can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be veri-
ALERT TYPE fied by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure
Alert 55 T055 Circuit B, Compressor 1 Failure Manual rise on start-up.
Alarm 55 A055 Circuit B, Compressor 1 Stuck on Manual
Failure IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify
Alarm 55 A055 Circuit B, Compressor 1 Stuck on that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check
Failure the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor
Alert 69 T069 Circuit B Compressor Return Auto is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and
Gas Thermistor Failure replace if necessary.
Alarm 78 A078 Circ.B Sat. Suction Temp Manual
Exceeds Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp
IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe com-
Alarm 91 A091 Circuit B Discharge Pressure Auto pressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor
Transducer Failure
is working.
Alarm 93 A093 Circuit B Suction Pressure Trans- Auto
ducer Failure COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS
Alarm 111 A111 Circuit B Loss of Charge Auto Circuit A A051, A052, A053, A055 — Alarm codes 051, 052,
Alarm 113 A113 Circuit B High Suction Tempera- Manual 053, and 055 are for compressors A1, A2/B1, and A3. These
ture alarms occur when the CSB detects current when the compres-
Alarm 115 A115 Circuit B Low Suction Superheat * sor should be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the
Alarm 117 A117 Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Manual compressor.
Temperature If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor re-
Alarm 123 A123 Circuit B High Pressure Switch Manual lay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous sec-
Trip onds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only monitored for a
Alarm 127 A127 Circuit B High Head Pressure * period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has been com-
Alarm 134 A134 Circuit B Low Suction Pressure * manded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service technician forcing
Alarm 151 A151 Illegal Configuration Auto a relay to test a compressor.
Alert 505 T505 Current Sensor Board Failure - Auto In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the current
B1 sensor board reports the compressor and the request off, certain di-
agnostics will take place as follows:
T051, T052, T053, T055 (Circuit A Compressor Failures) —
Alert codes 051, 052, 053, 055 are for compressors A1, A2/B1, 1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and the
and A3 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor current sensor board is on and the request is off, the control
(CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor oper- will command the condenser fans to maintain normal head
ation. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor. pressure.
If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor re- 2. The control will shut-off all other compressors.
lay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated. The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen com-
POSSIBLE CAUSES pressor relay on the MBB.
Compressor Overload — Either the compressor internal overload To check out alarms A051 to A053:
protector is open or the external overload protector (Kriwan, Co- 1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors should
peland CoreSense, or Lodam module) has activated. The external be off.
overload protector modules are mounted in the compressor wiring 2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there is
junction box. Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.
motor windings are the inputs to the module. The module is pow-
ered with 24 vac from the units main control box. The module out- 3. Check for welded contactor.
put is a normally closed contact that is wired in series with the 4. Verify CSB wiring.
compressor contactor coil. In a compressor motor overload condi- 5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation
tion, contact opens, de-energizing the compressor contactor. to verify that compressor current sensor is working and con-
Low Refrigerant Charge — If the compressor operates for an ex- denser fans are energized.
tended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the compressor A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure) — If the sen-
ASTP device will open, which will cause the compressor to trip sor reading is outside the range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C)
on its overload protection device. then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty
Circuit Breaker Trip — The compressors are protected from thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error,
short circuit by a breaker in the control box. or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the
Wiring Error — A wiring error might not allow the compressor to entire unit.
start. A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor
reading is outside the range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C) then
the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty
77
thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, A110, A111 (Circuit A, B Loss of Charge) — This alarm occurs
or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the when the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less
entire unit. than 26 psig (179.2 kPa).
T062 (Condenser Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure) — If the A112, A113 (Circuit A, B High Saturated Suction Tempera-
sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C) ture) — Alarm code 112 occurs when compressors in a circuit
then the alert will occur. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturated
thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, suction temperature is greater than 70°F (21.1°C). The high satu-
or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will send out an rated suction alarm is generated and the circuit is shut down.
alert only. A114, A115 (Circuit A, B Low Superheat) — Alarm code 114
T063 (Condenser Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor occurs when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5°F (2.8°C) for
reading is outside the range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C) then 5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alarm is generated and
the alert will occur. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty therm- the circuit is shut down. The RGT sensor must be installed.
istor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a A116, A117 (Circuit A, B Low Cooler Suction Temperature)
loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will send out an alert — Alarm code 116 occurs when mode 7 causes the compressor to
only. unload 3 consecutive times in less than 30-minute intervals be-
T068, T069 (Circuit A, B Compressor Return Gas Temperature tween each circuit shutdown. The low cooler suction temperature
Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs if the RGT is configured alarm is generated and the circuit is shut down. If this condition is
and the compressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the encountered, check the following items:
range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C). Failure of this thermistor • Check for a faulty expansion valve.
will shut down the appropriate circuit. • Check for a plugged filter drier.
T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This • Check for a low refrigerant charge condition.
alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside the • Check the suction pressure transducer for accuracy.
range of –40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C). Failure of this thermistor • Check the cooler flow rate.
will disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The • Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction.
OAT must be configured. • Consider a fouled cooler.
T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert oc- • Check the glycol concentration in the loop; high glycol con-
curs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 centrations can cause the same effect as a fouled cooler.
to 240°F (–40 to 116°C). Failure of this thermistor will disable any • Check that the water flow is in the proper direction.
elements of the control which requires its use. The cause of the P118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature
alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55 or T58 device, a T118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature
shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose
connection. The SPT must be configured. Criteria for Trip: This alert is part of the compressor protection
algorithm for digital compressor units. The following conditions
A077, A078 (Circuit Saturated Suction Temperature Exceeds must be true:
Cooler Leaving Water Temperature) — This alarm occurs when
the saturated suction temperature (SST) is greater than leaving wa- 1. This alert will be triggered if the unit has a digital compres-
ter for 5 minutes. This alarm will occur if either the suction pressor and it is enabled (ConfigurationUNIT
sure transducer reading, which is used to calculate SST, or cooler A1.TY=YES).
leaving water is incorrect. Potential causes for this alarm are loose 2. The discharge gas temperature (Temperatures CIR.A/
wiring connection, sensor not located in well, or bad Schrader fit- CIRC.BD.GAS) is greater than 268°F (131.1°C).
ting. Reset is manual. Action To Be Taken: Compressor A1 is shut down. If this is the
T079 (Dual Chiller Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs first or second occurrence within a 32-minute window, the pre-
when the dual chiller temperature sensor is outside the range of – alert P118 will be generated. This is a non-broadcast alert. If this
40 to 240°F (–40 to 116°C). Failure of this thermistor will disable is the third occurrence within the 32-minute window, the alert
dual chiller operation and return to stand-alone operation. The unit T118 is generated.
must be configured for dual chiller operation for this alert to occur. Reset Method: The first two times compressor A1 is shut down
The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or due to the pre-alert P118, the pre-alert will automatically reset
open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. after the discharge temperature is less than 250°F (121.1°C) and
Reset is automatic. the compressor will restart. The third occurrence will result in the
A090, A091 (Circuit A, B Discharge Pressure Transducer Fail- alert T118 and will require a manual reset.
ure) — This alarm occurs when the pressure is outside the range Multiple P118 pre-alerts may be stored in the alarm history. If
of 0.0 to 667.0 psig (0.0 to 4599 kPag). A circuit cannot run when there are 1 or 2 strikes on the circuit and the circuit recovers for a
this alarm is active. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alarm. period of time, it is possible to clear out the strikes, thereby reset-
The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v ting the strike counter automatically.
power supply, or a loose connection. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the fol-
A092, A093 (Circuit A, B Suction Pressure Transducer Fail- lowing items:
ure) — This alarm occurs when the pressure is outside the range • Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a
of 0.0 to 420.0 psig (0.0 to 2896 kPag). A circuit cannot run when leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit.
this alarm is active. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alarm. • Check the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) for
The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v accuracy.
power supply, or a loose connection. • Check the DTT connections.
T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs • Check unit configuration. A1.TY = NO if no digital com-
for units which have the digital compressor installed on circuit pressor is installed.
A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the circuit A122, A123 (Circuit A, B High Pressure Switch Failure) —
will be shut off. The valid range for this thermistor is –39.9 to The high-pressure switch is wired in series with the compres-
356°F (–39.9 to 180°C). The alert will reset itself when dis- sor contactor coils of each compressor on the circuit to dis-
charge temperature is less than 250°F (121.1°C). The cause of able compressor operation immediately upon a high dis-
the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor. charge pressure condition.
78
For all 30MP016-045, 30MPA050-071, and 30MP050-071 This alarm is also generated when the saturated suction tem-
high condensing units: The normally closed contacts in the perature is below the low limit for compressors (outside of com-
switches are calibrated to open at 650 ± 10 psig (448.2 ± 68.9 pressor envelope).
kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing temperature of If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
155.6 ± 1.3°F (68.7 ± 0.7°C). The pressure switches will automat- • Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a
ically reset when the discharge pressure is reduced to 500 ± 15 leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit.
psig (3448 ± 103.4 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated con- • Check for proper water flow for the cooler.
densing temperature of 134.1 ± 2.4°F (56.7 ± 1.3°C). • For 30MPA units, if the alarms are occurring during cold
For all 30MPW050-071 standard units: The normally closed ambient conditions, consider installing head pressure con-
contacts in the switches are calibrated to open at 558 ± 10 psig trol on remote condenser.
(3847 ± 68.9 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing • If wind baffles are required, check to see if they are
temperature of 140.3 ± 2.3°F (60.16 ± 16.5°C). The pressure installed.
switches will automatically reset when the discharge pressure is • Check the suction pressure transducer accuracy.
reduced to 435 ± 29 psig (2999 ± 199.9 kPag) which corresponds • Check for a low load condition. Check the control system to
to a saturated condensing temperature of 120.35 ± 5.3°F (49.08 ± see if the unit should be operating.
14.83°C). • Check for restrictions in the liquid line. Be sure all service
The output of the high-pressure switch is wired to inputs on the valves are open.
MBB to provide the control with an indication of a high pressure • Check the filter drier. Change the core(s) if necessary.
switch trip. This alert could occur when compressors are off if the • Check glycol concentration and make sure brine freeze (Set
wiring to the switch is broken or the switch has failed open. PointsFRZBR.FZ) is properly set for the concentra-
tion.
When the trip occurs, all mechanical cooling on the circuit is • Check the operation of the liquid line solenoid valves, if
shut down for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the circuit is allowed equipped. Be sure that the correct valve operates for the cir-
to restart. cuit.
A126, A127 (Circuit A, B High Head Pressure) — This alarm • Be sure that the liquid line solenoid valve is installed cor-
occurs when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature rectly (flow), if equipped.
is greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig. 58-60. Pri- • For the circuit TXV(s):
or to the alarm, the control will shut down one compressor on a - Check the superheat setting of the TXV. A very high setting
circuit if that circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is will cause low saturated suction condition.
greater than the maximum SCT minus 5°F (2.7°C). If SCT
continues to rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alarm - Check to be sure the proper TXV is installed.
will occur and the circuit’s remaining compressor will shut - Check the operation of the TXV.
down. The cause of the alarm is usually an overcharged sys- - Check the location of the TXV bulb and that it is properly
tem, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty out- installed on the suction line.
door coil (30MPA only), plugged filter drier, a faulty high-
pressure switch, faulty expansion valve, or loss of condenser - Check the TXV equalizer line to be sure that it is properly
water flow. Figures 58-60 shows the operating envelope for the connected to the suction line and open to suction pressure.
compressor.
170
160
150
140
130
120
SCT (F)
110
MAX SCT
100
FOR 30MPW016,
90 032
80
70
60
50
40
30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
SST (F)
LEGEND
SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
Fig. 58 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor, 30MP016-045 Units
79
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
SCT (F)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
SST (F) a30-5978
LEGEND
Fig. 59 — Operating Envelope for R410-A Compressor, 30MPA,MPW050-071 High Condensing Units
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
SCT (F)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
SST (F) a30-5979
LEGEND
Fig. 60 — Operating Envelope for R410-A Compressor, 30MPW050-071 Units
80
A133, A134 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure) — This alarm in- 205
dicates that after the compressor has been running for 1 minute
one of the following has occurred: suction pressure is below 34
psig (234 kPa), saturated suction temperature is less than 12°F (– 200
24.4°C) for 8 seconds, the suction pressure falls below 23 psig
(158 kPa), or saturated temperature is less than –18°F (–27.8°C).
The Circuit A low suction pressure alert occurs and the circuit is 195
shut down. The reset function will occur automatically for the first
Suction Pressure (psig)

daily occurrence and manually (MBB) for each re-occurrence. 190
If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• Check the unit refrigeration charge, a low charge condition
can cause low suction pressures. 185
• Check the TXV operation.
• Check the liquid line service valve to be sure that it is fully 180
open.
• Check the liquid line filter drier for a restriction.
• Check the head pressure control device. For 30MPA units, 175
check the remote condenser to be sure that it is operating
correctly. If the remote condenser does not have head pres- 170
sure control, consider adding it. For 30MPW units, check
the condenser water regulating valve for proper operation. If
the unit does not have head pressure control, consider add- 165
ing one, or adjusting the loop temperature. -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
A140 — Reverse Rotation Detected Time (sec)
Criteria for Trip: The alarm criterion is checked when the first LEGEND
compressor in a circuit is started. The control writes the value of Suction Pressure (psig)
the suction pressure 5 seconds before starting the first compressor Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig)
in the circuit. At the time the compressor is started, another read- Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)
ing is obtained. A rate of change is calculated based on the two
values and extrapolated to the expected value 5 seconds later. The Fig. 61 — Reverse Rotation Detection (psig)
suction pressure is obtained 5 seconds after the compressor has 1400
been started. If the suction pressure is not at least 1.25 psig (8.62
kPa) lower than the expected value or the upper limit for proof of
proper rotation, a reverse rotation alarm is declared.
The example below lists sample suction pressures of a starting cir-
cuit. Figures 61 and 62 show reverse rotation detection for this 1350
example.
Suction Pressure (psig)
SATURATED
SUCTION SUCTION
TIME PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE 1300
psig (kPa)
°F (°C)
t=–5 (5 seconds before
200.4 (1382) 70 (21.1)
compressor start)
t=0 (compressor start) 197.1 (1359) 69 (20.6)
1250
t=5 (5 seconds after
169.6 (1169) 60 (15.6)
compressor start)
Using the rate of change of the suction from the example, five
(5) seconds after t=0, the suction pressure should be 193.8 psig
(1336 kPa), if the compressor did not start. Subtracting the 1.25 1200
psig (8.62 kPa) from extrapolated suction pressure, 192.55 psig
(1328 kPa) determines the upper limit that if the suction pressure
is above this level the unit will fault on reverse rotation. This point
is denoted by a black dot in Fig. 61 and 62. In the example, the 1150
suction pressure is lower than the upper limit, and therefore is al- -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
lowed to continue operation. Time (sec)
Action To Be Taken: The unit shuts down immediately. LEGEND
Reset Method: Manual. Suction Pressure (psig)
Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig)
Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the fol- Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)
lowing items:
• Check the wiring of the incoming power for proper phasing. Fig. 62 — Reverse Rotation Detection (kPa)
This alarm may be disabled once the reverse rotation check A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) — If the CCN emergency
has been verified by setting Reverse Rotation Enable Con- stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit will
figurationSERVREV.R=DSBL. be immediately stopped.
• Check for an inoperative compressor
If the CCN point name EMSTOP in the system table is set to
emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and broad-
cast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is down.
This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to “enable.”
81
A151 — Illegal Configuration Alarm A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board) — This
Criteria for Trip: This alarm is indicated when an illegal configu- alarm indicates that there are communication problems with the
ration has been entered. There are several different configuration EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.
alarms. When expanding the alarm, the control will indicate T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Failure)
which configuration is incorrect. For example, if the wrong size is — This alert indicates that there are communication problems
configured, the A151 expansion will indicate “ILLEGAL CON- with the energy management module. All functions performed by
FIG - INVALID UNIT SIZE.” the EMM will stop, which can include demand limit, reset and ca-
Action To Be Taken: The unit is not allowed to start. pacity input. The alert will automatically reset.
Reset Method: Automatic, once the illegal configuration is cor- T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set point Input Failure) — This
rected. alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set point
• Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or
items shown in Table 63 based on the illegal configuration. greater than 22 mA.
A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure) — Reset is automatic when A175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) — This
all alarms are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capac- alarm will be generated when the Main Base Board (MBB) loses
ity. communication with the AUX Board. The digital control option
will be disabled while this alert is active. The chiller continues to
T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure) — A problem has run without Digital Compressor Control. The alert will reset auto-
been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try resetting matically if communication is re-established or the unit configura-
the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert continues, the tion for digital control, A1.TY Compressor A1 Digital? (Configu-
board should be replaced. ration Mode→UNIT) = NO.
A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure) — A problem has If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try resetting the
power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the • Check for a wiring error.
board should be replaced. • Check for a faulty communication bus, or no connection to
the AUX Board.
T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem • Check the AUX Board.
has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try re- • If the unit is configured for digital control, A1.TY Compres-
setting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert contin- sor A1 Digital? (Configuration Mode→UNIT) is YES, but
ues, the board should be replaced. the unit is not a Digital Capacity machine, (no digital com-
A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A pressor or AUX Board), this alarm will be generated.
problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure) — This alert indicates a
MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input. The input
alarm continues, the board should be replaced. value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. The reset
A157 (A/D Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detected function will be disabled when this occurs.
with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power and T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure) — This alert
check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board should indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit 4 to
be replaced. 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when
this occurs.
Table 63 — Illegal Configurations (Alarm A151)
ILLEGAL CONFIGURATION POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software.
Check the red LED on the AUX Board to be sure that it is blinking in unison with the other
boards in the unit. If it is not, it is not communicating:
AUX BOARD INCORRECT REVISION - Check the LEN Communication wiring for continuity to the Main Base Board.
- Check the AUX Board DIP Switch settings for the address.
For 208 volt systems, check the control transformer to be sure that it is tapped correctly.
Consider cycling power to the AUX Board.
AUX BOARD SOFTWARE REV Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software. The
AUX Board software revision can be found in the vendor part number, CEPL130567-03. The -
MUST BE 3 OR HIGHER 03 indicates Revision 03.
Check the part number of the AUX Board. It should have the Carrier Part Number
32GB500442EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130567-03). This board is required for the digital
AUX BOARD SHOULD BE AUX1, NOT AUX2 compressor output as well as the Motormaster drive signal. An AUX2 Board, Carrier Part
Number 332GB500432EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130568-02) does not have the capability
to supply these outputs.
INVALID UNIT SIZE HAS BEEN ENTERED Check to be sure that a valid unit size ConfigurationUNITSIZE has been entered.
UNIT CONFIGURATION SET TO Digital compressor, ConfigurationUNITA1.TY=YES, and hot gas Configuration
INVALID TYPE OPT1MLV=YES are both enabled. Only one can be enabled.
Ice mode is enabled, ConfigurationOPT2ICE.M=ENBL, but fluid type Configura-
FLUID IS WATER, ICE MAKING ENABLED
tionOPT1FLUD= 1 (water).
82
P200 (Coder Flow/Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start- If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Up Pre-Alarm) • Check for a wiring error for the chilled water flow switch,
T200 (Cooler Flow Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start- the chilled water flow switch’s connection to the MBB, or a
Up Alert) — If Cooler Pump Control is enabled, (Configura- wiring error to the chilled water pump.
tion→OPT1→CPC=ON) and the Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler • Check to see if the chilled water pump control has been
Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 1 minute of a start manually bypassed.
command, a P200 alarm will be declared. This is a non-broadcast- • Check for a faulty or grounded chilled water flow switch.
ing alarm. The control will wait for flow to be established before • Check chilled water pump contactor for welded contacts.
starting any compressors. If after 5 minutes, the Cooler Flow
Switch/Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts have not closed, the T200
alarm is declared. T203 (Loss of Communication with the Slave Chiller Alert) —
This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled,
Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 1 minute LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration→RSET),
of a start command, a P200 alarm will be declared. This is a non- the chiller has been configured to be the Master Chiller MS-
broadcasting alarm. The control will wait for flow to be estab- SL=MAST Master/Slave Select (Configuration→RSET) and it
lished before starting any compressors. If after 5 minutes, the has not established or lost communication with the Slave Chiller.
Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts have not When this alert is generated the dual chiller control will be dis-
closed, the T200 alarm is declared. abled and the unit will operate in stand-alone mode.
If Cooler Pump Control is not enabled, (Configura- If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
tion→OPT1→CPC=OFF) and the Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler
Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 5 minutes of a start • Check that the communication wiring between the two
command, a T200 alarm will be declared. chillers is proper and is not grounded.
• Check to be sure that both the Master and Slave Chillers are
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: on the same bus, CCNB CCN Bus Number (Configura-
• Check the chilled water flow switch for proper operation. tion→CCN).
• Check the flow switch cable for power and control. • Check to be sure that the slave chiller address CCNA CCN
• Check the chilled water loop to be sure that it is completely Address (Configuration→CCN) matches what is pro-
filled with water, and all air has been purged. grammed in the master chiller’s configuration for slave
• Check the chilled water pump interlock circuit for proper address, SLVA Slave Address (Configuration→RSET).
operation. • Check for power at the slave chiller. If power is not present,
• Check the pump electrical circuit for power. this alarm will be generated.
• Check the pump circuit breaker. • Check for a faulty master or slave MBB. If CCN communi-
• Check the pump contactor for proper operation. cations is not working, this alarm will be generated.
• Check the chilled water pump for proper operation. Look T204 (Loss of Communication with the Master Chiller Alert)
for overload trips. — This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled,
• Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction. LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration→RSET),
• Check to be sure that all isolation valves are completely open. the chiller has been configured to be the Slave Chiller MS-
P201 (Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal SL=SLVE Master/Slave Select (Configuration→RSET) and it
Operation Pre-alarm) has not established or lost communication with the Master Chiller.
A201 (Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal When this alert is generated the dual chiller control will be dis-
Operation Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the chilled abled and the unit will operate in stand-alone mode.
water flow switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
being closed, and a P201 - Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts • Check that the communication wiring between the two
Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and chillers is proper and is not grounded.
the machine will stop. If flow is proven, the machine will be al- • Check to be sure that both the master and slave chillers are
lowed to restart. If after 5 minutes, the cooler flow switch/inter- on the same bus, CCNB CCN Bus Number (Configura-
lock contacts do not close, the alarm will change to a A201 - Cool- tion→CCN).
er Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation • Check to be sure that the slave chiller address CCNA CCN
Alarm. When this alarm is generated the chiller is shut down. Address (Configuration→CCN) matches what is pro-
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: grammed in the master chiller's configuration for slave
• Check the chilled water flow switch for proper operation. address, SLVA Slave Address (Configuration→RSET).
• Check the flow switch cable for power and control. • Check for power at the master chiller. If power is not pres-
• Check the chilled water loop to be sure that it is completely ent, this alarm will be generated.
filled with water, and all air has been purged. • Check for a faulty master or slave MBB. If CCN communi-
• Check the chilled water pump interlock circuit for proper cations is not working, this alarm will be generated.
operation. T205 (Master and Slave Chiller with Same Address Alert) —
• Check the pump electrical circuit for power. This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled,
• Check the pump circuit breaker. LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration→RSET),
• Check the pump contactor for proper operation. the chiller has been configured to be the Master Chiller MS-
• Check the chilled water pump for proper operation. Look SL=MAST Master/Slave Select (Configuration→RSET) and
for overload trips. both the master chiller and slave chiller have the same address,
• Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction. CCNA CCN Address (Configuration→CCN). When this alert is
• Check to be sure that all isolation valves are completely generated the dual chiller control will be disabled and both units,
open. master and slave, will operate in stand-alone mode.
A202 (Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump Is Off If this condition is encountered, check to be sure that the Slave
Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the unit is configured Chiller address CCNA CCN Address (Configuration→CCN)
for CPC=ON Cooler Pump Control, (Configuration→OPT1) matches what is programmed in the Master Chiller's configuration
without a call for the Chilled Water Pump, C.LWP=OFF (Out- for slave address. SLVA Slave Address (Configuration→RSET).
puts→GEN.O) and the chilled water switch is closed, FLOW=ON T206 (High Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Alert) — The
Cooler Flow Switch (Inputs→GEN.I) for 5 minutes. When this criterion for this alert is checked when the unit is ON and the total
alarm is generated the chiller is not allowed to start.
83
available capacity is 100%. The alert is generated when the leav- P221 (Condenser Pump Interlock Opened During Normal
ing chilled water temperature is greater than the LCWT, High Operation Pre-alarm)
LCW Alert Limit (Configuration→OPT2) plus the control point A221 (Condenser Pump Interlock Opened During Normal
and the leaving chilled water temperature is higher than it was 1 Operation Alarm) — If the unit is configured for D.FL.S= ENBL
minute before the current reading. The LCWT is a delta tempera- Enable Cond Flow Switch (Configuration→OPT1) and condenser
ture, not an absolute value. The alert will automatically reset when flow interlock (if used) circuit was established and opens for 15
the leaving water temperature is less than the control point, or is seconds. When this alarm is generated the chiller is prevented
less than the control point plus LCWT minus 5°F (2.8°C). from starting or will be shut down; condenser and chilled water
If this condition is encountered: pumps are shut down.
• Check building load. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• Check the LCWT, High LCW Alert Limit (Configura- • Check for a condenser pump failure.
tion→OPT2) value. • Check for power at the condenser pump.
• Check compressor operation. • Check condenser pump control wiring.
• Check water flow. • Check condenser strainer for a restriction. Flush or replace
A207 (Cooler Freeze Protection Alarm) — This alarm will be as necessary.
generated when the leaving water temperature is below BR.FZ, • Check the condenser water flow switch operation.
Brine Freeze Point (Set Point Mode→FRZ). When this condition • Check condenser water flow switch wiring.
is encountered, the machine will enter Mode 16, and the Chilled • If the unit utilizes a flow regulating valve for head pressure
Water Pump relay will be energized, even if the CPC Cooler control, consider disabling this feature.
Pump Control (Configuration Mode→OPT1) is OFF. If the ma- A222 (Condenser Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off
chine is equipped with a pump, the pump will run for a minimum Alarm) — If the unit is configured for Condenser Pump Control,
of 5 minutes. The unit will be shut down or prevented from start- D.PM.E Enable Condenser Pump (Configuration→OPT1) is 1
ing. (On when Occupied) or 2 (On with Compressor), the Condenser
The control will allow the machine to reset automatically if the Flow Switch is enabled, D.FL.S=ENBL Enable Cond Flow
leaving chilled water temperature rises above the BR.FZ Brine Switch (Configuration→OPT1) and condenser flow interlock (if
Freeze Point (Set Point Mode→FRZ) plus 6°F (3.3°C). If the used) circuit is closed while the pump is commanded off, this
alarm is generated again during the same day, it shall be a manual alarm will be generated. When this alarm is generated the chiller is
reset. prevented from starting.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• Check the entering or leaving water thermistor for accuracy. • Check for a welded condenser pump contactor.
• Check water flow rate. • Check for a faulty condenser pump relay
• Check for freezing conditions. • Check for a wiring error.
• Check the heat tape and other freeze protection means for T302 (Strainer Blowdown Scheduled Maintenance Due) —
proper operation. This alert is generated when the S.T.DN Strainer Service Count-
• Check glycol concentration and adjust BR.FZ accordingly. down (Run Status→PM) has expired. Be sure date is correctly set:
A208 (EWT or LWT Thermistor Failure Alarm) — This alarm MNTH Month of Year, DAY Day of Month, and YEAR Year of
will be generated if the entering water temperature, EWT Entering Century (Time Clock→DATE). Complete the strainer blowdown.
Fluid Temp (Run Status→VIEW) is less than the leaving water Set S.T.MN Strainer Maintenance Done (Run Status→PM) to
temperature, LWT Leaving Fluid Temp (Run Status→VIEW) by YES. Then reset the alert.
3°F (1.7°C) or more for 1 minute after the circuit has started. If this condition is encountered, check the following item:
When this alarm is generated the chiller is shut down and prevent-
ed from starting. Chilled water pump is also shut down. • Strainer maintenance is required.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: T500, T501, T502, T505 (Current Sensor Board Failure —
Circuit Ax — Alert codes 500, 501, 502, 505 are for compressors
• Check for a correct chilled water flow. A1, A2/B1, and A3 respectively. These alerts occur when the out-
• Check the entering and leaving water thermistors for accu- put of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset auto-
racy. matically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must be re-
• Check to be sure the entering and leaving water thermistors placed.
are correctly wired and installed in the proper location.
T950 (Loss of Communication with Water System Manager)
A220 (Condenser Pump Interlock Failure to Close At Start-Up — This alert will be generated if no communications have been
Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the unit is configured received by the Main Base Board for five (5) minutes. When this
for D.FL.S=ENBL Enable Cond Flow Switch (Configura- occurs the Water System Manager (WSM) forces are removed.
tion→OPT1) and condenser flow interlock (if used) circuit fails to The chiller runs in stand-alone mode.
close within 5 minutes of the condenser pump start. When this
alarm is generated the chiller is prevented from starting or will be If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
shut down; condenser and chilled water pumps are shut down. • Check CCN wiring.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: • Check for power at the water system manager.
• Check Main Base Board for a communication failure.
• Check for a condenser pump failure.
• Check for power at the condenser pump. A951 (Loss of Communication with Chillervisor System Man-
• Check condenser pump control wiring ager) — This alarm will be generated if no communications have
• Check condenser strainer for a restriction. Flush or replace been received by the Main Base Board for five (5) minutes. When
as necessary. this alert is generated the Chillervisor System Manager (CSM)
• Check the condenser water flow switch operation. forces are removed, and chiller runs in stand-alone mode.
• Check condenser water flow switch wiring. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• If the unit utilizes a flow regulating valve for head pressure • Check CCN wiring.
control, consider disabling condenser flow switch feature. • Check for power at the Chillervisor System Manager.
• Check Main Base Board for a communication failure.
84
APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

VIEW AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS
EWT Entering Fluid Temp xxx.x °F EWT
LWT Leaving Fluid Temp xxx.x °F LWT
SETP Active Setpoint xxx.x °F SP
CTPT Control Point xxx.x °F CTRL_PNT
LOD.F Load/Unload Factor xxx SMZ
STAT Control Mode 0=Service Test x STAT
1=Off Local
2=Off CCN
3=Off Time
4=Off Emergency
5=On Local
6=On CCN
7=On Time
9=Pump Delay
OCC Occupied NO/YES OCC
MODE Override Modes in Effect NO/YES MODE
CAP Percent Total Capacity xxx CAP_T
DEM.L Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM
STGE Requested Stage x STAGE
ALRM Current Alarms and Alerts xxx ALRMALRT
TIME Time of Day 00:00 to 23:59 xx.xx TIMECOPY
MNTH Month of Year 1 to 12 xx MOY
(1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
DATE Day of Month 01 to 31 xx DOM
YEAR Year of Century xx YOCDISP
RUN UNIT RUN HOUR AND START
HRS.U Machine Operating Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HR_MACH
STR.U Machine Starts 0 to 1000000 xxxx CY_MACH
HR.P1 Cooler Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 xxxx HRS HR_CPUMP
HR.P2 Condenser Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 xxxx HRS HR_DPUMP
HOUR CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS
HR.A1 Compressor A1 Run Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HOURS_A1
HR.B1 Compressor B1 Run Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HOURS_B1
STRT COMPRESSOR STARTS
ST.A1 Compressor A1 Starts 0 to 999999 xxxx CY_A1
ST.B1 Compressor B1 Starts 0 to 999999 xxxx CY_B1
PM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE
STRNSI.ST Strainer Srvc Interval xxxx HRS SI_STRNR
STRNS.T.DN Strainer Srvc Countdown 0 to 65535 xxxx HRS ST_CDOWN Default: 8760
STRNS.T.MN Strainer Maint. Done 0 to 65535 NO/YES ST_MAINT
ST.DT STRAINER MAINT. DATES
ST.DTS.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
85
APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (CONT)
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

VERS SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS
MBB CESR131482-xx-xx
EXV* CESR131172-xx-xx
AUX1* CESR131333-xx-xx
EMM* CESR131174-xx-xx
MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx
NAVI* CESR130227-xx-xx
* If these devices are not installed, they will not show in the table.
Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

TEST SERVICE TEST MODE OFF/ON MAN_CTRL To enable Service Test
mode, move Enable/Off/
Remote control switch to
OFF. Change TEST to
ON. Move switch to
ENABLE.
OUTS OUTPUTS AND PUMPS
CLR.P Cooler Pump Relay OFF/ON S_CLPMP
CND.P Condenser Pump OFF/ON S_CNDPMP
UL.TM Comp A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 xx S_A1ULTM
CCH Crankcase Heater OFF/ON S_CCH
CW.VO Condenser Valve Open OFF/ON S_CWVO not supported
CW.VC Condenser Valve Close OFF/ON S_CWVC not supported
EXV.A EXV% Open xxx% S_EXV_A
LLS.A Liquid Line Solenoid OFF/ON S_LLSV
LLS.B Liquid Line Solenoid OFF/ON S_LLSV
RMT.A Remote Alarm Relay OFF/ON S_ALM
CDV.T Cond Water Valve % Open 0 to 100 % S_CDVT
CMPA CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TST
CC.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON S_A1_RLY
UL.TM Comp A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 xx S_A1ULTM
MLV Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON S_MLV
CMPB CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TST
CC.B1 Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON S_B1_Relay
86
Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS
CEWT Cooler Entering Fluid xxx.x °F COOL_EWT
CLWT Cooler Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F COOL_LWT
CDET Condenser Entering Fluid xxx.x °F COND_EWT
CDLT Condenser Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F COND_LWT
OAT Outside Air Temperature xxx.x °F OAT
SPT Space Temperature xxx.x °F SPT
DLWT Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F DUAL_LWT
CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
SCT.A Saturated Condensing Tmp -40 to 240°F TMP_SCTA
SST.A Saturated Suction Temp -40 to 240°F TMP_SSTA
RGT.A Compressor Return Gas Temp -40 to 240°F TMP_RGTA
D.GAS Discharge Gas Temp -40 to 356°F DISGAS
SH.A Suction Superheat Temp -100 to 200 ΔF SH_A
CIR.B TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT B
SCT.B Saturated Condensing Tmp -40 to 240°F TMP_SCTB
SST.B Saturated Suction Temp -40 to 240°F TMP_SSTB
RGT.B Compressor Return Gas Temp -40 to 240°F TMP_RGTB
SH.B Suction Superheat Temp -100 to 200 ΔF SH_B
Pressure Mode Directory

PRC.A PRESSURES CIRCUIT A
DP.A Discharge Pressure -14 TO 750 PSIG DP_A
SP.A Suction Pressure -14 TO 750 PSIG SP_A
PRC.B PRESSURE CIRCUIT B
DP.B Discharge Pressure -14 TO 750 PSIG DP_B
SP.B Suction Pressure -14 TO 750 PSIG SP_B
Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS
CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 –20 to 70°F xxx.x °F CSP1 44°F
CSP.2 Cooling Setpoint 2 –20 to 70°F xxx.x °F CSP2 44°F
CSP.3 ICE Setpoint –20 to 32°F xxx.x °F CSP3 32°F
HEAD HEAD PRESSURE SET-
POINTS
H.DP Head Setpoint 55 to 130°F xxx.x °F HSP 75°F
FRZ BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT
BR.FZ Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34°F xxx.x °F BRN_FRZ 34°F
87
Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS
STST Start/Stop Switch STRT/STOP START
FLOW Cooler Flow Switch OFF/ON COOLFLOW
CD.FL Condenser Flow Switch OFF/ON CONDFLOW
DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OFF/ON DMD_SW1
DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 OFF/ON DMD_SW2
ICED Ice Done OFF/ON ICE_DONE
DUAL Dual Setpoint Switch OFF/ON DUAL_IN
CRCT CIRCUIT INPUTS
FKA1 Compressor A1 Feedback OFF/ON K_A1_FBK
FKB1 Compressor B1 Feedback OFF/ON K_B1_FBK
HPS.A High Pressure Switch A OFF/ON HPSA
HPS.B High Pressure Switch B OFF/ON HPSB
4-20 4-20 MA INPUTS
DMND 4-20 ma Demand Signal xx.x LMT_MA
A.DL Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM
RSET 4-20 ma Reset Signal xx.x RST_MA
D.RST Degrees of Reset DEG_RST
CSP 4-20 ma Cooling Setpoint xx.x CSP_IN
Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS
C.LWP Cooler Pump Relay OFF/ON COOLPUMP
C.DWP Condenser Pump OFF/ON CONDPUMP
ALRM Alarm State OFF/ON ALM
CNDV Cond Water Valve % Open xxx.x CNDV
CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
CC.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON K_A1_RLY
D.PER Compressor A1 Load Percent OFF/ON DIGITALP
CCH Crankcase Heater Relay OFF/ON CCH_RLY
LLV.A Liquid Line Solenoid OFF/ON LLSV_A
MLV.R Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY
CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B
CC.B1 Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON K_B1_RLY
CCH.B Crankcase Heater Relay ON/OFF CCHB
LLV.B Liquid Line Solenoid B OFF/ON LLSV_B
A.EXV
EXV.A EXV% Open OFF/ON EXV_A
APPR Circuit A Approach OFF/ON CIRA_APP
AP.SP Approach Setpoint OFF/ON APPRA_SP
X.SH.R SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig MAXSHRST
S.SH.R Digload to Start SH RST SHRSTBGN
SH_R Amount of SH Reset SH_RESET
OVR.A EXVA Override OFF/ON EXVAOVRR
SPH.A Suction Superheat Temp OFF/ON SH_A
ASH.S Active Superheat Setpt OFF/ON ACTSH_SP
AMP.S Active Mop Setpt OFF/ON ACMOP_SP
PLM.A Cir A EXV Position Limit OFF/ON PLMA
* Not Supported
88
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
TEST Test Display LEDs OFF/ON DISPTEST
METR Metric Display OFF = English DISPUNIT OFF = English
ON = Metric
LANG Language Selection 0 to 3 0 = English LANGUAGE 0
1 = Espanol
2 = Francais
3 = Portuguese
PAS.E Password Enable DSBL/ENBL PASS_EBL ENBL
PASS Service Password 0 to 9999 XXXX PASSCOPY 1111
UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION
TYPE Unit Type 2 to 3 2=Air Cooled, UNIT_TYP CONFIGH
3=Water Cooled
SIZE Unit Size 10 to 100 TONS SIZE
SZA.1 Compressor A1 Size 0 to 50 TONS SIZE_A1
A1.TY Compressor A1 Digital? NO/YES CPA1TYPE CONFIG
MAX.T Maximum A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 SECONDS MAXULTME CONFIG
SZB.1 Compressor B1 Size 0 to 50 TONS SIZE_B1
D.TYP Discharge Gas Therm Type No/Yes DGASTYPE CONFIG
OPT1 UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
FLUD Cooler Fluid 1 to 2 1 = Water FLUIDTYP 1 = Water
2 = Medium Temp
Brine
MLV.S Minimum Load Vlv Select NO/YES MLV_FLG NO
RG.EN Return Gas Sensor Enable DISABLE/ENABLE RGT_ENA
OAT.E Enable OAT Sensor DISABLE/ENABLE OAT_ENA
CSB.E CSB Boards Enable DISABLE/ENABLE CSB_ENA
CPC Cooler Pump Control OFF/ON CPC ON
PM.DY Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 MIN PUMP_DLY 1 MIN
D.PM.E Enable Condenser Pump 0 to 2 0=No Control CONDPMPE 0=No Control
1=On When Occu-
pied
2=On with Com-
pressors
D.FL.S Enable Cond Flow Switch DISABLE/ENABLE CONDFLSW DSBL
CDWS Enable Cond Wtr Sensors DISABLE/ENABLE CONDWTRS DSBL
H.CND High Condensing Enable DISABLE/ENABLE HI_COND CONFIG
OPT2 UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
CTRL Control Method 0 to 3 X0=Switch CONTROL 0=Switch
1=Occupancy
2=Occupancy
3=CCN
LCWT High LCW Alert Limit 2 to 60 DEG. F LCW_LMT 60°F
DELY Minutes Off Time 0 to 15 MINUTES DELAY 0
ALR.C Alarm Relay Usage 0 to 2 ALRMCNFG
ICE.M Ice Mode Enable DISABLE/ENABLE ICE_CNFG DSBL
(requires EMM)
89
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

EXV.A CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION
EXV.L EXV Opening at Low LWT 0 to 50% XX% 25%
LWT.L LWT for EXV Min Opening 20 to 40°F XX° F 10 F
EXV.H EXV Opening at High LWT 0 to 70% XX% 50%
LWT.H LWT for EXV Max Opening 20 to 70°F XX° F 35 F
MIN.A EXV CIRC.A Min Position 0 to 100 XXX 2
RNG.A EXVA Steps in Range 0 to 65535 XXXXX 3690
SPD.A EXVA Steps Per Second 0 to 65535 XXXXX 150
POF.A EXVA Fail Position In% 0 to 100 XXX 0
MIN.A EXVA Minimum Steps 0 to 65535 XXXXX 0
MAX.A EXVA Maximum Steps 0 to 65535 XXXXX 3690
OVR.A EXVA Overrun Steps 0 to 65535 XXX 167
TYP.A EXVA Stepper Type 0 = UNIPOLAR 0,1 1
1 = BIPOLAR
H.SCT High SCT Threshold 50 to 140 XXX 115
X.PCT Open EXV X% on 2nd COMP 0 to 30 XX 10
X.PER Move EXV X% on DISCRSOL 0 to 30 XX 5
DELY Lag Start Delay 0 to 100 XXX 10
L.DL.T Low SH Delta T - EXV Move 0 to 240 XXX 6
SHR.T EXV Rate Threshold –1.0 to 1.0F XX.X F 0.2F
LEXM Low SH Override EXV Move 0.4 to 3.0 X.X% 1.0%
CCN CCN NETWORK CONFIGS
CCNA CCN Address 1 to 239 XXX CCNADD 1
CCNB CCN Bus Number 0 to 239 XXX CCNBUS 0
BAUD CCN Baud Rate 1 = 2400 X CCNBAUDD 3 = 9600
2 = 4800
3 = 9600
4 = 19,200
5 = 38,400
RSET RESET COOL TEMP
CRST Cooling Reset Type 0 = No Reset X CRST_TYP 0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA
Input
2 = Outdoor Air
Temp
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temp
MA.DG 4-20 - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F XX.XΔF MA_DEG 10.0F
RM.NO Remote - No Reset Temp 0 to 125°F XXX.X °F REM_NO 10.0F
RM.F Remote - Full Reset Temp 0 to 125°F XXX.X °F REM_FULL 0.0F
RM.DG Remote - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F XX.X ΔF REM_DEG 0.0F
RT.NO Return - No Reset Temp 0 to 30F XXX.XΔF RTN_NO 10F
RT.F Return - Full Reset Temp 0 to 10F XXX.XΔF RTN_FULL 0.0F
RT.DG Return - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F XX.XΔF RTN_DEG 0.0F
DMDC Demand Limit Select 0 = None X DMD_CTRL 0 = None
1 = Switch
(Requires EMM)
2 = 4 to 20 mA
Input (Requires
EMM)
3 = CCN Loadshed
DM20 Demand Limit at 20 mA 0 to 100 XXX% DMT20MA 100
SHNM Loadshed Group Number 0 to 99 XXX SHED_NUM 0
SHDL Loadshed Demand Delta 0 to 60 XXX% SHED_DEL 0
SHTM Maximum Loadshed Time 0 to 120 XXX SHED_TIM 60
DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 0 to 100 XXX% DLSWSP1 80
DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 0 to 100 XXX% DLSWSP2 50
LLEN Lead/Lag Chiller Enable DSBL/ENBL LL_ENA DSBL
MSSL Master/Slave Select SLVE/MAST MS_SEL MAST
SLVA Slave Address 0 to 239 XXX SLV_ADDR 0
90
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

RSET RESET COOL TEMP
LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select 0 = Master Leads X LL_BAL 0 = Master Leads
1 = Slave Leads
2 = Automatic
LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 hours XXX LL_BAL_D 168
LLDY Lag Start Delay 0 to 30 minutes XXX LL_DELAY 5 minutes
PARA Parallel Configuration NO/YES PARALLEL YES
SLCT SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD
CLSP Cooling Set Point Select 0 = Single X CLSP_TYP 0 = Single
1 = Dual Switch
2 = Dual CCN
Occupied
3 = 4 to 20 mA
Input
RL.S Ramp Load Select DSBL/ENBL RAMP_EBL ENBL
CRMP Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2 to 2 X.X CRAMP 1.0
SCHD Schedule Number 0 to 99 XX SCHEDNUM 0
Z.GN Deadband Multiplier 1 to 4 X.X Z_GAIN 1.0
SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION
EN.A1 Enable Compressor A1 DSBL/ENBL ENABLEA1
EN.B1 Enable Compressor B1 DSBL/ENBL ENABLEB1
REV.R Reverse Rotation Enable DSBL/ENBL REVR_ENA ENBL
BCST BROADCAST CONFIGURATION
T.D.BC CCN Time/Date Broadcast OFF/ON CCNBC OFF
OAT.B CCN OAT Broadcast OFF/ON OATBC OFF
G.S.BC Global Schedule Broadcst OFF/ON GSBC OFF
BC.AK CCN Broadcast Ack'er OFF/ON CCNBCACK OFF
C.VLV COND VALVE CONFIGURATION
CNIS Cond Water Isolation Disable/Enable CNIS config
HPCT Head Pressure Control Disable/Enable HPCT config
CDMX Cond Wtr Valve Max Pos 1 to 100 % CDMX
CDMN Cond Wtr Valve Min Pos 0 to 99 % CDMN
CDCL Cond Wtr Valve Close Pos 0 to 100 % CDCL config
CDVP Cond Wtr Valve Start Pos 0 to 100 % CDVP
H.PGM HP Mid Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNMC config
H.TCM HP Mid Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TIMC config
H.PGH HP High Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNHC config
H.TCH HP High Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TIHC config
H.PGL HP Low Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNLC config
H.TCL HP Low Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TILC config
H.CWL Cond Gain Schedule Temp 50 to 130 dF COND_LIM config
H.AWD HP Anti-windup Factor 0 to 10 ANTIWIND config
SW.DB HP Ckt Switch Dead-Band 0 to 10 dF CKTSW_DB config
91
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

TIME TIME OF DAY
HH.MM Hour and Minute 0 to 65535 XXXXX TIME
DATE MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND
YEAR
MNTH Month of Year 1 to 12 XX MOY
(1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
DOM Day of Month 1 to 31 XX DOM
DAY Day of Week 1 to 7 (1 = Monday, X DOWDISP
2 = Tuesday, etc.)
YEAR Year of Century 1999 to 2098 XXXX YOCDISP
DST DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
STR.M Month 1 to 12 XX STARTM 4
STR.W Week 1 to 5 X STARTW 1
STR.D Day 1 to 7 X STARTD 7
MIN.A Minutes to Add 0 to 90 XX MINADD 60
STP.M Month 1 to 12 XX STOPM 10
STP.W Week 1 to 5 XX STOPW 5
STP.D Day 1 to 7 XX STOPD 7
MIN.S Minutes to Subtract 0 to 90 XX MINSUB 60
HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES
HD.01 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01
HD.01MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON01
HD.01DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY01
HD.01LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN01
92
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES
93

SCH.N SCHEDULE NUMBER 0 to 99 XX SCHEDNUM 0
SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHED-
ULE
PER.1 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1
PER.1OCC.1 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER1OCC
PER.1UNC.1 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER1UNC
PER.1MON.1 Monday In Period NO/YES PER1MON
PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER1TUE
PER.1WED.1 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER1WED
PER.1THU.1 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER1THU
PER.1FRI.1 Friday In Period NO/YES PER1FRI
PER.1SAT.1 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER1SAT
PER.1SUN.1 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER1SUN
PER.1HOL.1 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER1HOL
94

95

OVR SCHEDULE OVERRIDE
OVR.T Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 hours X OVR_EXT 0
OVR.L Override Time Limit 0 to 4 hours X OTL 0
T.OVR Timed Override NO/YES TIMEOVER NO
Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT
MD01 CSM controlling Chiller OFF/ON MODE_1
MD02 WSM controlling Chiller OFF/ON MODE_2
MD03 Master/Slave control OFF/ON MODE_3
MD05 Ramp Load Limited OFF/ON MODE_5
MD06 Timed Override in effect OFF/ON MODE_6
MD07 Low Cooler Suction TempA OFF/ON MODE_7
MD08 Low Cooler Suction TempB OFF/ON MODE_8
MD09 Slow Change Override OFF/ON MODE_9
MD10 Minimum OFF time active OFF/ON MODE_10
MD13 Dual Setpoint OFF/ON MODE_13
MD14 Temperature Reset OFF/ON MODE_14
MD15 Demand/Sound Limited OFF/ON MODE_15
MD16 Cooler Freeze Protection OFF/ON MODE_16
MD17 Low Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_17
MD18 High Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_18
MD19 Making ICE OFF/ON MODE_19
MD20 Storing ICE OFF/ON MODE_20
MD21 High SCT Circuit A OFF/ON MODE_21
MD22 High SCT Circuit B OFF/ON MODE_22
MD23 Minimum Comp. On Time OFF/ON MODE_23
MD24 Pump Off Delay Time OFF/ON MODE_24
MDAO Circuit A Trio Oil Mgmt OFF/ON MD_A_OIL
96
Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

CRNT CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS
AA01
AA02
AA03
AA04
AA05
AA06
AA07
AA08
AA09
AA10
AA11 Alarms are shown as
AA12 AXXX
AXXX Alerts are shown as
AA13 Current Alarms 1-25 TXXX TXXX
AA14 PXXX PreAlerts are shown as
PXXX
AA15
AA16
AA17
AA18
AA19
AA20
AA21
AA22
AA23
AA24
AA25
RCRN Reset All Current Alarms NO/YES ALRESET
HIST ALARM HISTORY
AL01
AL02
AL03
AL04
AL05
AL06
AL07
AL08
Alarms are shown as
AL09 AXXX
AL10 AXXX Alerts are shown as
Alarm History 1-20 TXXX TXXX
AL11 PXXX PreAlerts are shown as
AL12 PXXX
AL13
AL14
AL15
AL16
AL17
AL18
AL19
AL20
97
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES
CCN NETWORK TABLES
TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

A_UNIT GENERAL UNIT
PARAMETERS
Control Mode 10-char ASCII STAT
Occupied No/Yes OCC
CCN Chiller Stop/Start CHIL_S_S forcible
Alarm State 6-char ASCII ALM
Active Demand Limit NNN % DEM_LIM forcible
Override Modes in Effect No/Yes MODE
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAP_T
Requested Stage NN STAGE
Active Setpoint NNN.n °F SP
Control Point NNN.n °F CTRL_PNT forcible
Degrees of Reset NN.n deltaF DEG_RST
Entering Fluid Temp NNN.n °F EWT
Leaving Fluid Temp NNN.n °F LWT
Emergency Stop Enable/EMStop EMSTOP forcible
Minutes Left for Start 5-char ASCII MIN_LEFT
PUMPS
Cooler Pump Relay Off/On COOLPUMP
Condenser Pump Off/On CONDPUMP
Cooler Flow Switch Off/On COOLFLOW
Condenser Flow Switch Off/On CONDFLOW
Cond Water Valve % Open % NNN.n CNDV forcible
CIRCA_AN CIRCUIT A ANALOG
PARAMETERS
Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPA_T
Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPA_A
Discharge Pressure NNN.n PSIG DP_A
Suction Pressure NNN.n PSIG SP_A
Head Setpoint NNN.n °F HSP
Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n °F TMP_SCTA
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F TMP_SSTA
Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F TMP_RGTA
Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n deltaF SH_A
CIRCB_AN CIRCUIT B ANALOG
PARAMETERS
Percent Total Capacity 0 to 100 % CAPB_T
Percent Available Cap. 0 to 100 % CAPB_A
Discharge Pressure B –14 to 750 PSIG DP_B
Suction Pressure B –14 to 750 PSIG SP_B
Head Setpoint 85 to 120 °F HSP
Saturated Condensing Temp B –40 to 240 °F TMP_SCTB
Saturated Suction Temp B –40 to 240 °F TMP_SSTB
Compressor Return Gas –40 to 240 °F TMP_RGTB
Temp B
Suction Superheat Temp 100 to 200 deltaF SH_B
98
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (CONT)
CCN NETWORK TABLES (cont)

CIRCADIO CIRCUIT A DISCRETE
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor A1 Relay Off/On K_A1_RLY
Compressor A1 Unload Time NN secs ALUNLTME
Minimum Load Valve Relay Off/On MLV_RLY
CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor A1 Feedback Off/On K_A1_FBK
CIRCBDIO CIRCUIT B DISCRETE
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor B1 Relay Off/On K_B1_RLY
Liquid Line Solenoid B Off/On LLSV_B LLSV_B
CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor B1 Feedback Off/On K_B1_FBK
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES

OPTIONS UNIT PARAMETERS
UNIT ANALOG VALUES
Cooler Entering Fluid –40.0 to 240.0 °F COOL_EWT
Cooler Leaving Fluid –40.0 to 240.0 °F COOL_LWT
Condenser Entering Fluid –40.0 to 240.0 °F COND_EWT
Condenser Leaving Fluid –40.0 to 240.0 °F COND_LWT
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid –40.0 to 240.0 °F DUAL_LWT
TEMPERATURE RESET
4-20 ma Reset Signal 0.0 to 22.0 milliAmps RST_MA
Outside Air Temperature –40.0 to 240.0 °F OAT forcible
Space Temperature –40.0 to 240.0 °F SPT forcible
DEMAND LIMIT
4-20 ma Demand Signal 0.0 to 22.0 milliAmps LMT_MA
Demand Limit Switch 1 Off/On DMD_SW1
Demand Limit Switch 2 Off/On DMD_SW2
CCN Loadshed Signal 0 to 2 DL_STAT
MISCELLANEOUS
Dual Setpoint Switch Off/On DUAL_IN
Cooler LWT Setpoint –20 to 70 °F LWT_SP
Ice Done Off/On ICE_DONE
EXVA_TAB
EXVA Position in Steps NNNNNN steps EXVAPOSS
EXVA Position in Percent NNNN.nn % EXVAPOSP
EXVA Commanded Steps NNNNNN steps EXVACMDS
EXVA Run Status NNN EXVASTAT
EXVA Write Command Off/On EXVARITE
EXVA Command Byte NNN EXVACMDB
EXVA Absolute Percentage NNNN.nn % EXVAABSP
EXVA Delta Percentage NNNNN.n % EXVADELP
Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n °F TMP_SSTA
Compressor Return Gas Temp NNN.n °F TMP_RGTA
99
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES (cont)

EXVA_TAB
(cont)
Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n °F DISGAS
EXV % Open NNN % EXV_A
Amount of SH Reset NNN.n deltaF SH_RESET
EXVA Override NNNNN EXVAOVRR
EXVA Steps in Range NNNNN steps EXVARANG
EXVA Steps Per Second NNNNN EXVARATE
EXVA Fail Position in % NNNN.nn % EXVAPOSF
EXVA Minimum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMINS
EXVA Maximum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMAXS
EXVA Overrun Steps NNNNN steps EXVAOVRS
EXVA Stepper Type NNN EXVATYPE
STRTHOUR
Machine Operating Hours 0 to 999999 hours HR_MACH
Machine Starts 0 to 1000000 hours CY_MACH
Compressor A1 Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 hours HR_A1
Compressor B1 Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 hours HR_B1
Compressor A1 Starts 0 to 999999 CY_A1
Compressor B1 Starts 0 to 999999 CY_B1
PUMP HOURS
Cooler Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 hours HR_CPUMP
Condenser Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 hours HR_DPUMP
CURRMODS
CSM controlling Chiller Off/On MODE_1
WSM controlling Chiller Off/On MODE_2
Master/Slave control Off/On MODE_3
Ramp Load Limited Off/On MODE_5
Timed Override in effect Off/On MODE_6
Low Cooler Suction TempA Off/On MODE_7
Low Cooler Suction TempB Off/On MODE_8
Slow Change Override Off/On MODE_9
Minimum OFF time active Off/On MODE_10
Dual Setpoint Off/On MODE_13
Temperature Reset Off/On MODE_14
Demand/Sound Limited Off/On MODE_15
Cooler Freeze Protection Off/On MODE_16
Low Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_17
High Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_18
Making ICE Off/On MODE_19
Storing ICE Off/On MODE_20
High SCT Circuit A Off/On MODE_21
High SCT Circuit B Off/On MODE_22
Minimum Comp. On Time Off/On MODE_23
Pump Off Delay Time Off/On MODE_24
Circuit A Trio Oil Mgmt Off/On MD_A_OIL
100
ALARMS
Active Alarm #1 4-char ASCII ALARM01C
VERSIONS
CESR131172- 5-char ASCII EXV
CESR131333- 5-char ASCII AUX
CESR131482- 5-char ASCII MBB
CESR131174- 5-char ASCII EMM
CESR131171- 5-char ASCII MARQUEE
CESR131227- 5-char ASCII NAVIGATOR
LOADFACT CAPACITY CONTROL
Load/Unload Factor NNN SMZ
Control Point NNN.n °F CTRL_PNT
Entering Fluid Temp NNN.n °F EWT
Leaving Fluid Temp NNN.n °F LWT
Ramp Load Limited Off/On MODE_5
Slow Change Override Off/On MODE_9
Cooler Freeze Protection Off/On MODE_16
Low Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_17
High Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_18
Minimum Comp. On Time Off/On MODE_23
LEARNFNS
SCT Delta for Comp A1 0 to 50 deltaF A1SCTDT
SCT Delta for Comp B1 0 to 50 deltaF B1SCTDT
PM-STRN
Strainer Srvc Interval NNNNN hours SI_STRNR
Strainer Srvc Countdown NNNNN hours ST_CDOWN
Strainer Maint. Done No/Yes ST_MAINT
Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM0
101

PM-STRN
(cont)
TESTMODE
Service Test Mode Off/On NET_CTRL
Compressor A1 Relay Off/On S_A1_RLY
Compressor B1 Relay Off/On S_B1_RLY
Cooler Pump Relay Off/On S_CLPMP
Condenser Pump Off/On S_CNDPMP
Comp A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 secs S_A1ULTM
Remote Alarm Relay Off/On S_ALM
Cond Water Valve % Open 0.0 to 100.0 % S_CDVT
RUNTEST
Percent Total Capacity A 0 to 100 % CAPA_T
Percent Available Cap. A 0 to 100 % CAPA_A
Discharge Pressure A -14 to 750 PSIG DP_A
Suction Pressure A -14 to 750 PSIG SP_A
Saturated Condensing °F TMP_SCTA
Temp. A -14 to 240
Saturated Suction Temp A -40 to 240 °F TMP_SSTA
Compr Return Gas Temp A -40 to 240 °F TMP_RGTA
Discharge Gas Temp A -40 to 356 °F DISGAS
Suction Superheat Temp A -100 to 200 deltaF SH_A
Minimum Load Valve Relay Off/On MLV_RLY
Percent Total Capacity B 0 to 100 % CAPA_T
Percent Available Cap. B 0 to 100 % CAPA_B
Discharge Pressure B -14 to 750 PSIG DP_B
Suction Pressure B -14 to 750 PSIG SP_B
Saturated Condensing Temp B -40 to 240 °F TMP_SCTB
Saturated Suction Temp B -40 to 240 °F TMP_SSTB
Compr Return Gas Temp B -40 to 240 °F TMP_RGTB
Discharge Gas Temp B -40 to 356 °F DISGAS
Suction Superheat Temp B -100 to 200 deltaF SH_B
Compressor B1 Relay Off/On K_B1_RLY
Compressor B1 Feedback Off/On K_B1_FBK
Outside Air Temperature -40 to 240 °F OAT
Space Temperature -40.0 to 240.0 °F SPT
Cooler Pump Relay Off/On COOLPUMP
Condenser Pump Off/On CONDPUMP
Cooler Entering Fluid -40.0 to 240.0 °F COOL_EWT
Cooler Leaving Fluid -40.0 to 240.0 °F COOL_LWT
Condenser Entering Fluid -40.0 to 240.0 °F COND_EWT
Condenser Leaving Fluid -40.0 to 240.0 °F COND_LWT
Cooler Flow Switch Off/On COOLFLOW
102

DUALCHIL
Dual Chiller Link Good? No/Yes DC_LINK
Master Chiller Role 12-char ASCII MC_ROLE
Slave Chiller Role 12-char ASCII SC_ROLE
Lead Chiller Ctrl Point NNN.n °F LEAD_CP
Lag Chiller Ctrl Point NNN.n °F LAG_CP
Control Point NNN.n °F CTRL_PNT
Cool EnteringFluid-Slave NNN.n °F COOLEWTS
Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave NNN.n °F COOLLWTS
Cooler Entering Fluid NNN.n °F COOL_EWT
Cooler Leaving Fluid NNN.n °F COOL_LWT
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid NNN.n °F DUAL_LWT
Percent Avail.Capacity NNN % CAP_A
Percent Avail.Cap.Slave NNN % CAP_A_S
Lag Start Delay Time 5-char ASCII LAGDELAY
Load/Unload Factor NNN SMZ
Load/Unload Factor-Slave NNNN SMZSLAVE
Lead SMZ Clear Commanded No/Yes LEADSMZC
Lag SMZ Clear Commanded No/Yes LAG_SMZC
Lag Commanded Off? No/Yes LAG_OFF
Dual Chill Lead CapLimit NNN.n % DCLDCAPL
Dual Chill Lag CapLimit NNN.n % DCLGCAPL
WTRVALVE
Saturated Condensing Tmp -40 to 240 °F TMP_SCTA
Saturated Condensing Tmp -40 to 240 °F TMP_SCTB
Cond Water Valve % Open 0.0 to 100.0 % CNDV forcible
Output to Valve Actuator 0.00 to 10.00 VLV_AO
Filter Signal - TMP_SCTA -40.0 to 240.0 °F SCT_AF
Filter Signal - TMP_SCTB -40.0 to 240.0 °F SCT_BF
HP Ctrl Fn Output -1000.00 to 1000.0 % HPFN_OUT
HP Ctrl Fn Error -1000.00 to 1000.0 % HPFN_ERR
Cmd Out Before Step Rate 0.00 to 100.00 % HPFN_CMD
Head Pressure Run State 0 to 2 HP_STATE
103
CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES
TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNIT S POINT NAME DEFAULT

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION
Unit Type 2 to 3 UNIT_TYP Unit Dependent
Unit Size 10 to 100 tons SIZE Unit Size
Compressor A1 Size 0 to 50 tons SIZE_A1 Unit Size Dependent
Compressor B1 Size 0 to 50 tons SIZE_B1 Unit Size Dependent
Suction Superheat Setpt 5 to 20 deltaF SH_SP 9.0 deg F
Compressor A1 Digital? No/Yes CPA1TYPE Unit Dependent
Maximum A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 secs MAXULTME 10 - 020 to 030
7 - 035 to 045
OPTIONS1 OPTIONS 1 CONFIGURATION
Cooler Fluid 1 to 2 1=Water FLUIDTYP 1=Water
2=Medium Tem-
perature Brine
Minimum Load Vlv Select No/Yes MLV_FLG No
Return Gas Sensor Enable Disable/Enable RGT_ENA Disable
Enable OAT Sensor Disable/Enable OAT_ENA Disable
CSB Boards Enable Disable/Enable CSB_ENA Enable
Reverse Rotation Enable Disable/Enable REVR_ENA Enable
Cooler Pump Control Off/On CPC Off
Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 mins PUMP_DLY 1
EMM Module Installed No/Yes EMM_BRD No
Enable Condenser Pump 0 to 2 0=No Control CONDPMPE 0=No Conrol
1=On When Occu-
pied
2=On with Com-
pressors
Enable Cond Wtr Sensors Disable/Enable CONDWTRS Disable
Enable Cond Flow Switch Disable/Enable CONDFLSW Disable
High Condensing Enable Disable/Enable HI_COND Disable
OPTIONS2 OPTIONS 2 CONFIGURATION
Control Method 0 to 3 CONTROL 0
Loading Sequence Select 1 to 2 SEQ_TYPE 1
Lead/Lag Circuit Select 1 to 3 LEAD_TYP 1
Cooling Setpoint Select 0 to 3 CLSP_TYP 0
Ramp Load Select Disable/Enable RAMP_EBL Enable
High LCW Alert Limit 2 to 60 deltaF LCW_LMT 60.0
Minutes Off time 0 to 15 mins DELAY 0
Deadband Multiplier 1.0 to 4.0 Z_GAIN 1.0
Ice Mode Enable Disable/Enable ICE_CNFG Disable
Alarm Relay Usage 0 to 2 ALRMCNFG
Compressor Min Off Time 3 to 5 mins MIN_OFF 5
SCHEDOVR TIME OVERRIDE SETUP
Schedule Number NN SCHEDNUM 1
Override Time Limit N hours OTL 0
Timed Override Hours N hours OVR_EXT 0
Timed Override No/Yes TIMEOVER No
RESETCON TEMPERATURE RESET AND
DEMAND LIMIT
COOLING RESET
Cooling Reset Type N CRST_TYP 0
4-20 MA RESET
4-20 - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF MA_DEG 10.0
REMOTE RESET
Remote - No Reset Temp NNN.n °F REM_NO 10.0
Remote - Full Reset Temp NNN.n °F REM_FULL 0.0
Remote - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF REM_DEG 0.0
104
CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES (cont)
TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME DEFAULT

RESETCON TEMPERATURE RESET AND
(cont) DEMAND LIMIT (cont)
RETURN TEMPERATURE
RESET
Return - No Reset Temp NNN.n deltaF RTN_NO 10.0
Return - Full Reset Temp NNN.n deltaF RTN_FULL 0.0
Return - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF RTN_DEG 0.0
DEMAND LIMIT
Demand Limit Select N DMD_CTRL 0
Demand Limit at 20 mA NNN.n % DMT20MA 100.0
Loadshed Group Number NN SHED_NUM 0
Loadshed Demand Delta NN % SHED_DEL 0
Maximum Loadshed Time NNN mins SHED_TIM 60
Demand Limit Switch 1 NNN % DLSWSP1 80
Demand Limit Switch 2 NNN % DLSWSP2 50
DUALCHILL DUAL CHILLER
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
LEAD/LAG
Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Disable/Enable LL_ENA Disable
Master/Slave Select Master/Slave MS_SEL Master
Slave Address NNN SLV_ADDR 2
Lead/Lag Balance Select N LL_BAL 0
Lead/Lag Balance Delta NNN hours LL_BAL_D 168
Lag Start Delay NN mins LL_DELAY 5
Parallel Configuration No/Yes PARALLEL Yes
DISPLAY MARQUEE DISPLAY SETUP
Service Password NNNN PASSWORD 1111
Password Enable Disable/Enable PASS_EBL Enable
Metric Display Off/On DISPUNIT Off
Language Selection N LANGUAGE 0
EXVACONF EXV CIRCUIT A
CONFIGURATION
EXV Opening at Low LWT NNN.N % EXV_Y1 25
LWT for EXV Min Opening NNN.N LWT_X1 10
EXV Opening at High LWT NNN.N % EXV_Y2 50
LWT for EXV Max Opening NNN.N °F LWT_X2 35
EXV Circ. A Min Position NNN.N % EXVAMINP 2
EXVA Steps in Range NNNNN steps EXVARANG 2500
EXVA Steps Per Second NNNNN EXVARATE 150
EXVA Fail Position In % NNNN.NN % EXVAPOSF 0
EXVA Minimum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMINS 0
EXVA Maximum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMAXS 2500
EXVA Overrun Steps NNNNN steps EXVAOVRS 167
EXVA Stepper Type NNN EXVATYPE 1
High SCT Threshold NNN.N °F HIGH_SCT 115
Open EXV X% on 2nd comp NNN.N % EXV_HSCT 10
Move EXV X% on NNN.N % EXVDISCR 5
DISCRSOL
Lag Start Delay NNN sec DELAYLAG 10
SH Reset Maximum NNN.N ^F MAXSHRST 11
Cap at SH Offset Maximum NNN.N % SHRSTBGN 25
SH Rate Threshold NNN.N ^F SHR_THR 0.2
Low SH DeltaT EXV Move NNN sec LSH_DL_T 60
Low SH Override EXV Move NNN.N % LSH_EXVM 1
105
CCN SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE SERVICE
Brine Freeze Point -20.0 to 34.0 °F BRN_FRZ 34.0
COMPRESSOR ENABLE
Enable Compressor A1 Disable/Enable ENABLEA1 Unit Dependent
Enable Compressor B1 Disable/Enable ENABLEB1 Unit Dependent
VLV_CTRL
Cond Water Isolation Disable/Enable CNIS config
Head Pressure Control Disable/Enable HPCT config
Cond Wtr Valve Max Pos 1.0 to 100.0 % CDMX
Cond Wtr Valve Min Pos 0.0 to 99.0 % CDMN
Cond Wtr Valve Close Pos 0.0 to 100.0 % CDCL config
Cond Wtr Valve Start Pos 0.0 to 100.0 % CDVP
HP Mid Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNMC config
HP Mid Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TIMC config
HP High Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNHC config
HP High Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TIHC config
HP Low Cap Prop Gain 0 to 10 HP_PGNLC config
HP Low Cap Intgr Time 1 to 200 HP_TILC config
HP Anti-windup Factor 0 to 10 ANTIWIND config
HP Ckt Switch Dead-Band 0.0 to 10.0 °F CKTSW_DB config
Cond Gain Schedule Temp 50.0 to 130.0 °F COND_LIM config
Valve Move Rate Limiter 0.1 to 1.0 % RATE_LIM config
SCT Deadband 0.0 to 10.0 °F SCT_DB config
CCN SETPOINT TABLES

SETPOINT SETPOINT
COOLING
Cooling Setpoint 1 NNN.n °F CSP1 44.0
Cooling Setpoint 2 NNN.n °F CSP2 44.0
ICE Setpoint NNN.n °F CSP3 32.0
RAMP LOADING
Cooling Ramp Loading N.n CRAMP 1.0
Brine Freeze Point NNN.n °F BRN_FRZ 34.0
106
APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION
The following section is used to configure the UPC Open control-
ler which is used when the BACnet1 communication option is 9 0
selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main control
1
7 8
2 34
10's
box per unit components arrangement diagrams.
6
5
TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user
must give the UPC Open controller an address that is unique on 9 0
1
the BACnet network. Perform the following procedure to assign
7 8
2 34
1's
an address:
6
5
1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw termi-

nal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches
Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address each time
power is applied to it. BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC Open
2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the control- controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address. This De-
ler's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit of the vice Instance MUST be unique for the complete BACnet system
address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones digit. in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The Device In-
stance is auto generated by default and is derived by adding the
As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25, point MAC address to the end of the Network Number. The Network
the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on the Ones Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101, but it can be
(1's) switch to 5. changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView2 device. By default, a
MAC address of 20 will result in a Device Instance of 16101 +
20 which would be a Device Instance of 1610120.
1. BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE (American Society of 2. BACView is a registered trademark of Automated Logic
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers). Corporation.
BT485
TERMINATOR
BACNET
CONNECTION POWER LED
(BAS PORT)
Tx1 LED
Rx1 LED
Tx2 LED
Rx2 LED BACNET
BAUD RATE
8 DIP SWITCHES
67 9
EIA-485 10
01
45
JUMPERS 23
ADDRESS
8 ROTARY
67 9
1
01
SWITCHES
45
23
RUN LED
ERROR LED
Fig. A — UPC Open Controller
107
APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (CONT)
CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/TP —
Use the same baud rate and communication settings for all
controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open controller
is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this proto-
col's communications.
If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull the
screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals la-
beled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP Switches and
jumpers each time power is applied to it.
Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS
Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP
switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A. Fig. C — DIP Switches
Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings
for MS/TP Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy-
chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are 22 AWG
DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance, twisted,
Off Off Off Off On Off stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length is 2000 ft.
Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set to Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last Multi-Chiller
EIA-485 and 2W. Controller on a network segment to add bias and prevent signal
distortions due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E. For Multi-
The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches set Chiller Controller only need BT485 on the end.
for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.
To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:
Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropri-
ate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600, 19.2k, 1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's BAS
38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. C and Table B. Port.
2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and grounds.
Table B — Baud Selection Table
3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s screw
BAUD RATE DS2 DS1 terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.
9,600 Off Off NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network segment.
19,200 On Off 4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC
38,400 Off On Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently
76,800 On On connected.
5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a mod-
WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/TP ule status report. To perform a module status report using the
NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates using BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold the “FN” key
BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications at 9600 then press the “.” key.
bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.
Fig. D — Network Wiring
108
Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation
To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator on to outer jacket than the SmokeGard2 specification, and it is appropri-
the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. ate for use in applications where the user is concerned about abra-
NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with it. sion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to crack in extremely low
temperatures.
To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products
i-Vu® Open Control System Master Prices. NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum
signal integrity.
MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommenda-
tions are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL tem-
perature rating specifications list two acceptable alternatives. The 1. Halar is a registered trademark of Solvay Plastics.
Halar1 specification has a higher temperature rating and a tougher 2. SmokeGard is a registered trademark of AlphaGary-Mexichem Corp.
Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDATION
Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable
Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)
Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.
Color Code Black/White
Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal
Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire
SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.
Jacket
Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.
DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal
Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor
Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal
Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)
SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)
UL Temperature Rating Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)
Voltage 300 Vac, power limited
Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable
DC — Direct Current
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
NEC — National Electrical Code
O.D. — Outside Diameter
TC — Tinned Copper
UL — Underwriters Laboratories
109
Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS
Wire Type Description Connect Air Belden RMCORP Contractors

International Wire and Cable
22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC
MS/TP specifications.
Network (RS-485) 24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —
for specifications.
Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable
CMP — Communications Plenum Rated
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
TC — Tinned Copper
LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for CCN Element
The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad display unit or and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.
the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are re-
Open controller. These items let the user access the controller quired, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations must
network information. These are accessory items and do not be changed.
come with the UPC Open controller.
The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address
The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the and Bus number in the ComfortLink controller. These configura-
UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must be tions can be changed using the scrolling marquee display or acces-
running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local access sory Navigator handheld device.
port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will require an addi-
tional USB link cable for connection. Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)
See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instructions Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)
on connecting and using the BACview6 device. The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address
To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), consult Commercial and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These configura-
Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices. tions can be changed using the accessory BACview6 display.
CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S PROP- Navigation: BACview→CCN
ERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink controller Home: Element Comm Stat
must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) number and Element: 1
Bus: 0
Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection
110
If the UPC Open controller is used with the chiller application COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the con-
of Lead/Lag/Standby (Lead/Lag/Standby applications are not used troller is communicating with the devices on the network. See Ta-
with the Multi-Chiller Controller), all chillers and UPC Open con- bles E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication traffic
troller's CCN element numbers must be changed to a unique num- based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the more solid
ber in order to follow CCN specifications. In this application, the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs on UPC Open
there can only be a maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a module.
CCN bus. REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC Open
For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC controller’s 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a mini-
Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/ mum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power outages.
Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician must
change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger on the IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open controller
CCN bus. when replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data
For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC Open will be lost.
defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/Lag/Stand-
Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the
by application is used, then the Carrier technician must change the
configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster on the CCN battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's
bus. polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open controller.
NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the controller
TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or ad-
dressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical is shown in Table G.
Support. Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN point
name.
Table E — LED Status Indicators
LED STATUS
Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on
Power the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition
that caused the fault returns to normal.
Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is a Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Run Lights based on controller status. See Table F.
Error Lights based on controller status. See Table F.
Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication
RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS
2 flashes per second Off Normal
2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error
2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted
2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network
2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted
5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running
5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running
7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout
14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout
111
Table G — Network Points List
Point Name CCN Variable Name Read / Write Point Range Units BACnet BACnet
Object Name Object ID
4-20 ma Demand Signal LMT_MA R 0-20 mA lmt_ma_1 AV:36
4-20 ma Reset Signal RST_MA R 0-20 mA rst_ma_1 AV:33
Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM R/W 0-100 % dem_lim_1 AV:2
Active Setpoint SP R -20-70 °F sp_1 AV:4
Alarm State ALM R NORMAL_ALARM alm_1 BV:59
CCN Chiller CHIL_S_S R/W START_STOP chil_s_s_1 BV:4
CCN Loadshed Signal DL_STAT R 0-2 dl_stat_1 AV:37
Circuit A Trio Oil Mgmt MD_A_OIL R ON_OFF md_a_oil_1 BV:51
Comp A1 Unload Time A1UNLTME R 1-15 sec a1unltme_1 AV:78
Compressor A1 Feedback K_A1_FBK R ON_OFF k_a1_fbk_1 BV:16
Compressor A1 Relay K_A1_RLY R ON_OFF k_a1_rly_1 BV:13
Compressor A1 Run Hours HR_A1 R 0-9999 hr hr_a1_1 AV:60
Compressor A1 Starts CY_A1 R 0-9999 cy_a1_1 AV:68
Compressor B1 Feedback K_B1_FBK R ON_OFF k_b1_fbk_1 BV:66
Compressor B1 Relay K_B1_RLY R ON_OFF k_b1_rly_1 BV:67
Compressor B1 Run Hours HR_B1 R 0-9999 hr hr_b1_1 AV:29
Compressor B1 Starts CY_B1 R 0-9999 cy_b1_1 AV:34
Compr Return Gas Temp TMP_RGTA R -40-245 °F tmp_rgta_1 AV:20
Compr Return Gas Temp TMP_RGTB R -40-245 °F tmp_rgtb_1 AV:35
Condenser Entering Fluid COND_EWT R -40-245 °F cond_ewt_1 AV:10
Condenser Leaving Fluid COND_LWT R -40-245 °F cond_lwt_1 AV:18
Condenser Pump Relay CONDPUMP R ON_OFF condpump_1 BV:2
Condenser Pump Run Hours HR_DPUMP R 0-9999 hr hr_dpump_1 AV:72
Cond Water Valve % Open CNDV R/W 0-100 % cndv_1 AV:86
Control Method CONTROL R 1 = Switch
2 = Occupancy
3 = Occupancy
4 = CCN control_msv_1 MSV:5
Control Mode STAT R 0-9 stat_1 AV:8
Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W -20-70 °F ctrl_pnt_1 AV:5
Cooler Entering Fluid COOL_EWT R -40-245 °F cool_ewt_1 AV:30
Cooler Flow Switch COOLFLOW R OPEN_CLOSE coolflow_1 BV:11
Cooler Fluid FLUIDTYP R 1 = Water
2 = Medium Brine fluidtyp_msv_1 MSV:4
Cooler Freeze Protection MODE_16 R ON_OFF mode_16_1 BV:42
Cooler Leaving Fluid COOL_LWT R -40-245 °F cool_lwt_1 AV:31
Cooler LWT Setpoint LWT_SP R -20-70 °F lwt_sp_1 AV:38
Cooler Pump Relay COOLPUMP R ON_OFF coolpump_1 BV:7
Cooler Pump Run Hours HR_CPUMP R 0-9999 hr hr_cpump_1 AV:71
Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly PUMP_DLY R/W 0-10 min pump_dly_1 AV:41
Cooling Ramp Loading CRAMP R/W 0.2-2.0 °F cramp_1 AV:56
Cooling Reset Type CRST_TYP R 1 = No Reset
2 = 4-20mA Input
3 = External Temp - Oat
4 = Return Fluid
5 = External Temp - Spt crst_typ1_msv_1 MSV:7
Cooling Setpoint 1 CSP1 R/W -20-70 °F csp1_1 AV:53
Cooling Setpoint 2 CSP2 R/W -20-70 °F csp2_1 AV:54
CSM Controlling Chiller MODE_1 R ON_OFF mode_1_1 BV:30
Demand Level 1 R/W 0-100 dmv_lvl_1_perct_1 AV:80
112
Table G — Network Points List (cont)
BACnet BACnet
Point Name CCN Variable Name Read / Write Point Range Units Object Name Object ID
Demand Limit Select DMD_CTRL R 1 = None
2 = External Sw. Input
3 = 4-20mA Input
4 = Loadshed dmd_ctrl_msv_1 MSV:8
Demand Limit Switch 1 DMD_SW1 R ON_OFF dmd_sw1_1 BV:25
Demand Limit Switch 2 DMD_SW2 R ON_OFF dmd_sw2_1 BV:26
Demand/Sound Limited MODE_15 R ON_OFF mode_15_1 BV:41
Discharge Gas Temp DISGAS R -40-245 °F disgas_1 AV:15
Discharge Pressure DP_A R 0-999 psig dp_a_1 AV:13
Discharge Pressure DP_B R 0-999 psig dp_b_1 AV:40
Dual Setpoint MODE_13 R ON_OFF mode_13_1 BV:39
Dual Setpoint Switch DUAL_IN R ON_OFF dual_in_1 BV:29
Element Comm Status R No Comm_Normal element_stat_1 BV:2999
Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W ENA_EMS emstop_1 BV:6
Entering Fluid Temp EWT R -40-245 °F ewt_1 AV:6
Head Setpoint HSP R/W 55-120 °F hsp_1 AV:85
High SCT Circuit A MODE_21 R ON_OFF mode_21_1 BV:47
High SCT Circuit B MODE_22 R ON_OFF mode_22_1 BV:68
High Temperature Cooling MODE_18 R ON_OFF mode_18_1 BV:44
Ice Done ICE_DONE R ON_OFF ice_done_1 BV:27
ICE Setpoint CSP3 R/W -20-32 °F csp3_1 AV:55
Lead/Lag Circuit Select LEAD_TYP R/W 1-3 lead_typ_1 AV:43
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid DUAL_LWT R -40-245 °F dual_lwt_1 AV:32
Leaving Fluid Temp LWT R -40-245 °F lwt_1 AV:7
Loading Sequence Select SEQ_TYPE R/W 1-2 seq_type_1 AV:77
Low Cooler Suction Temp A MODE_7 R ON_OFF mode_7_1 BV:35
Low Cooler Suction Temp B MODE_8 R ON_OFF mode_8_1 BV:69
Low Temperature Cooling MODE_17 R ON_OFF mode_17_1 BV:43
Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R 0-9999 hr mr_mach_1 AV:57
Machine Starts CY_MACH R 0-9999 cy_mach_1 AV:58
Making ICE MODE_19 R ON_OFF mode_19_1 BV:45
Master/Slave Control MODE_3 R ON_OFF mode_3_1 BV:32
Minimum Comp. On Time MODE_23 R ON_OFF mode_23_1 BV:49
Minimum Load Valve Relay MLV_RLY R ON_OFF mlv_rly_1 BV:79
Minimum OFF Time Active MODE_10 R ON_OFF mode_10_1 BV:38
Minutes Left for Start MIN_LEFT R 00:00-15:00 min min_left_1 AV:39
Minutes Off Time DELAY R/W 0-15 min delay_1 AV:42
Occupancy Status OCC R YES_NO occ_status_1 BV:2008
Outdoor Air Temperature OAT R/W -40-245 °F oa_temp_1 AV:1003
Override Modes in Effect MODE R YES_NO mode_1 BV:5
Percent Available Cap. CAPA_A R 0-100 % capa_a_1 AV:12
Percent Available Cap. CAPB_A R 0-100 % capb_a_1 AV:45
Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R 0-100 % cap_t_1 AV:3
Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R 0-100 % capa_t_1 AV:11
Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R 0-100 % capb_t_1 AV:46
Pump Off Delay Time MODE_24 R ON_OFF mode_24_1 BV:50
Ramp Load Limited MODE_5 R ON_OFF mode_5_1 BV:33
Requested Stage STAGE R 0-99 stage_1 AV:9
Saturated Condensing Tmp TMP_SCTA R -40-245 °F tmp_scta_1 AV:16
Saturated Condensing Tmp TMP_SCTB R -40-245 °F tmp_sctb_1 AV:47
Saturated Suction Temp TMP_SSTA R -40-245 °F tmp_ssta_1 AV:17
Saturated Suction Temp TMP_SSTB R -40-245 °F tmp_sstb_1 AV:48
Slow Change Override MODE_9 R ON_OFF mode_9_1 BV:37
Space Temperature SPT R/W -40-245 °F space_temp_1 AV:2007
Storing ICE MODE_20 R ON_OFF mode_20_1 BV:46
Strainer Maint. Done ST_MAINT R/W YES_NO st_maint_1 BV:55
Strainer Srvc Countdown ST_CDOWN R 0-9999 hr st_cdown_1 AV:52
Strainer Srvc Interval SI_STRNR R/W 0-9999 hr si_strnr_1 AV:51
Suction Pressure SP_A R 0-999 psig sp_a_1 AV:14
Suction Pressure SP_B R 0-999 psig sp_b_1 AV:49
113
Table G — Network Points List (cont)
BACnet BACnet
Point Name CCN Variable Name Read / Write Point Range Units Object Name Object ID
Suction Superheat Temp SH_A R -40-245 °^F sh_a_1 AV:44
Suction Superheat Temp SH_B R -40-245 °^F sh_b_1 AV:50
System Cooling Demand Level R 1-3 cool_demand_level_1 AV:9006
System Demand Limiting R ACTIVE_INACTIVE dem_lmt_act_1 BV:83
Temperature Reset MODE_14 R ON_OFF mode_14_1 BV:40
Timed Override in Effect MODE_6 R ON_OFF mode_6_1 BV:34
User Defined Analog 1 R/W user_analog_1_1 AV:2901
User Defined Binary 1 R/W user_binary_1_1 BV:2911
WSM Controlling Chiller MODE_2 R ON_OFF mode_2_1 BV:31
LEGEND
R — Read
W — Write
114
APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS
30MP Weekly Maintenance Log
Plant ___________________________ Unit ID ______________________
Machine Model No. ________________
DATE OIL LEVELS CHECK ALARMS OPERATOR REMARK

/ FAULTS INITIALS
115
APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (CONT)
30MP Monthly Maintenance Log
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Operator
UNIT
ACTION UNIT ENTRY
SECTION
Check Oil Level yes/no
Compressor
Leak Test yes/no
Inspect and Clean Cooler yes/no Every 3 - 5 Years
Inspect Cooler Heater amps
Cooler Leak Test yes/no
Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI
Inspect Water Pumps yes/no
Leak Test yes/no
Condenser
Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil yes/no
General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no Annually
Controls Check Pressure Transducers yes/no
Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no
General Tightening and Cleaning Connections yes/no Annually
116
Starter
Inspect All Contactors yes/no
Check Refrigerant Charge yes/no
System Verify Operation of EXVs and Record Position 0-100%
Record System Superheat deg. F
NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.
INDEX
Actuator CCN loadshed, 34 Ramp loading, 19
Installation, 42 Discharge temperature thermistor Refrigerant
Manual override, 42 (DTT), 15 Adjusting charge, 39
30MP016-045, 42 Dual leaving water temperature sensor Preliminary charge, 37
30MP050-071, 42 (DLWT), 15 Refrigeration circuit
Operation, 42 Electronic expansion valves, 47 Charging, 47
Part Numbers, 43 Emergency On/Off switch, 7 Safety, 2,3
Removal, 42 Enable/Off/Remote Control switch, 7 Scrolling marquee display
30MP016-030, 42 Energy management module Described, 3
30MP040-071, 42 (EMM), 16,18 Menu structure, 4
30MP032, 42 Described, 7 Service, 47
Settings, 42 Evacuation and dehydration, 38 Service test, 47
30MPW016-045 head pressure Evaporator isolation, 41 Sizes, unit, 3
control, 42 Expansion Valve Board (EXV) Space temperature sensor, 15
30MP016-045 evaporator Described, 7 Start-up, 37
isolation, 42 Filter drier service, 55 Checklist, CL-1 to CL-8
30MP050-071 head pressure control Head pressure control System check (pre-start-up), 36
and evaporator isolation, 42 30MPW only, 41 Temperature reset, 31
Troubleshooting, 42 Adjusting PI routines, 45 4 to 20 mA temperature reset, 32
Alarms and alerts, 71 Condenser water isolation, 46 Menu configuration, 32
Codes, 72 Configuration and operation, 45 Outside air temperature reset, 32
Details, 72 Saturated condensing temperature set Space temperature reset, 32
History, 97 point, 45 Return temperature reset, 33
Resetting, 97 Service test mode, 47 Thermostatic expansion valves, 20
Alarm routing, 25 High pressure switch (HPS) Thermistors
Auxiliary board (AUX) Described, 14 Described, 55
Described, 7 Usage, 55 Designations (MBB), 14
Schematic, 12 Language, changing display, 6 Performance Check, 56
BACnet communication option, 107 LEDs, 7 Replacing, 56,
BAS port, configuring, 108 Main base board (MBB) Temperature vs. resistance/voltage
Device instance address, 107 Described, 7 drop (5K), 57, 59
Points list, 112-117 Schematic, 12 Temperature vs. resistance/voltage
Capacity control, 17 Maintenance, 64 drop (10K), 60, 62
Overrides, 18 Schedule, 64 Temperature vs. resistance (86K), 63
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN), 13 Measure of units, changing display, 6 Time, day, date
Tables, 98-106 Minimum load control, 36 Broadcast, 20
Wiring, 16 Minutes left for start, 18 Daylight savings time, 20
Chilled water flow switch, 56 Minutes off time, 18 Troubleshooting, 64
Compressors Motor overload protection, Alarms and alerts, 71
Adjusting oil charge, 39 compressor, 66 Alarm and alert codes, 72-75
Checking oil level, 39 Copeland with TF code, 66 Alarm and alert details, 72-84
Digital, 36 Copeland with TW or TE, 66 Resetting alarms, 72-75
Discharge Check Valve, 64 CoreSense module mounting, 68 UPC Open controller
Enabling and disabling, 64 Kriwan, 67 Addressing, 107
Failure Alerts, 77 Navigator display Battery, testing and replacing, 111
Locations, 49 Backlight brightness, 6 Configuring, 110
Motor overload protection, 66 Contrast adjustment, 6 LEDs, 111
Motor protection, 71 Display tables, 85-106 Local access, 110
Operating envelope, 79,67 Occupancy schedule Wiring, 108
Replacement, 49 CCN global, 24 Water treatment, 53
Safeties, 64 Holidays, 21 Wiring, Carrier Comfort Network
Stuck on failure alarms, 77 Local schedule, 21 (CCN), 16
Compressor return gas temp sensor Setting, 21 Wiring schematics, control
(RGT.A), 15 Timed override, 24 30MP016-071, 11
Condenser entering fluid sensor Oil Wiring schematics, power
(CDET), 15 Adjusting charge (start-up), 39 30MP016-071, 10
Condenser fan output, 27 Checking level (start-up), 39
Condenser leaving fluid sensor (CDLT), 15 Charging (service), 53
Condenser pump control, 27 Quantity per compressor, 40
Control methods (start/stop) Operating limitations, 40
CCN control, 25 Operating modes
Enable-Off-Remote, 21 Defined, 5
Occupancy schedule, 21 MD06, 24
Setting, 26 MD10, 18
Control module communication Outdoor-air temperature sensor
Green LED (main base board), 7 (OAT), 15
Red LED (main base board), 7 Passwords
Yellow LED (main base board), 7 Changing, 7
Control wiring schematics Configuration and service, 7
30MP016-071, 11 Entering, 7
Cooling entering fluid sensor (EWT), 18 Power wiring schematics
Cooling leaving fluid sensor (LWT), 15 30MP016-071, 10
Current sensing board (CSB) Pre-start-up, 36
Described, 7 Pressure transducers
Deadband multiplier, 19 Color, 14
Demand limit, 34 Described, 14
2-stage switch controlled, 34 Safeties, 55
4 to 20 mA controlled, 34 Troubleshooting, 56
117
© 2019 Carrier Corporation
Catalog No. 04-53300181-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-5T Rev. A Pg 118 11-19 Replaces: 30MP-4T
START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30MP LIQUID CHILLER
(Remove and use for job file.)
NOTE: To avoid injury to personnel and damage to equipment or

property when completing the procedures listed in this start-up
checklist, use good judgment, follow safe practices, and adhere to
the safety considerations/information as outlined in preceding
sections of this Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Trou-
bleshooting document.
A. Preliminary Information
JOB NAME _____________________________
ADDRESS _____________________________
CITY ____________________ STATE ______________ ZIP ___________
MARK FOR _____________________________
INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ______________
SALES OFFICE _________________________
START-UP PERFORMED BY ______________
B. Preliminary Equipment Check (Yes or No)

Is there any shipping damage? If so, where
Was it noted on the freight bill?  YES  NO
Has a claim been filed with the shipper?  YES  NO
Will this damage prevent unit start-up?  YES  NO
Check power supply. Does it agree with unit?  YES  NO
Has the circuit protection been sized and installed properly?  YES  NO
Are the power wires to the unit sized and installed properly?  YES  NO
Has the ground wire been connected?  YES  NO
Are all electrical terminals tight?  YES  NO
System fluid volume in the loop ____________________gal (l)
Does this meet installation guide requirements?  YES  NO
Water system cleaned per installation guide?  YES  NO
Minimum flow rates verified per installation guide?  YES  NO
In-line minimum 40-mesh strainer installed within 10 ft of the cooler/condenser water inlet?
Cooler:  YES  NO
Condenser:  YES  NO
Air separation / bleed devices installed per installation guide?  YES  NO
Catalog No. 04-53300181-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-5T Rev. A Pg CL-1 11-19 Replaces: 30MP-4T
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C. Cooler Loop Freeze Protection (if required)
Gallons (liters) added:________________
Piping includes electric tape heaters if piping is exposed to temperatures below freezing?  YES  NO
On brine units, has the cooler fluid been properly protected from freezing to at least 15°F
(8.3°C) below the lowest anticipated leaving fluid temperature set point?  YES  NO
Have the main base board, energy management module (option) and control relay
connections been checked for tightness?  YES  NO
(30MPA ONLY)
Has the refrigerant piping been done per the installation guide?  YES  NO
Piping dehydrated and evacuated per installation guide?  YES  NO
Unit charged per the installation guide?  YES  NO
(ALL 30MPA AND 30MPW030, 040-071)
CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

Crankcase heaters have been energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start-up?  YES  NO
SIGNATURE REQUIRED
Preliminary check complete.
Installing/Mechanical Contractor_______________________________________Date____________
D. Unit Start-Up (qualified individuals only, factory start-up recommended)

(insert check mark as each item is completed)
EQUIPMENT: Chiller: MODEL NO. SERIAL NO.
COMPRESSORS:
A1 A2/B1 A3
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.

Chiller has been properly interlocked with the auxiliary contacts of the chilled fluid pump starter.
 YES  NO
Chiller has been properly interlocked with the auxiliary contacts of the condenser water pump starter
(30MPW units only).  YES  NO
Compressor oil level is correct.  YES  NO
Liquid line service valve is back seated (30MPA units only).  YES  NO
Set point should be adjusted to the desired cooler leaving fluid temperature.
Leak check thoroughly: check all compressors, condenser manifolds and headers, TXVs, solenoid valves, filter
driers, fusible plugs, thermistors, and cooler connections using electronic leak detector. Locate, repair, and report
any refrigerant leaks.
Check voltage imbalance: AB_________ AC_________ BC_________
AB + AC + BC (divided by 3) = average voltage = ____________
Maximum deviation from average voltage =____________
CL-2
D. Unit Start-Up (cont)
Voltage imbalance = (max. Deviation) x 100 = % voltage imbalance
average voltage
If over 2% voltage imbalance, do not attempt to start chiller! Call local power company for assistance.
Incoming power voltage to chiller modules is within rated unit voltage range?  YES  NO
CHECK PRESSURE DROP ACROSS COOLER.
Fluid entering cooler: psig (kpa)____________
Fluid leaving cooler: psig (kpa)_______________
(psig difference) x 2.31 = ft of fluid pressure drop =____________
Plot cooler pressure drop on performance data chart (located in Installation Instructions literature) to determine
total gpm (l/s) for fresh water systems. For glycol, contact your Carrier representative.
Total gpm (l/s) =______________ Unit's rated min gpm (l/s) =___________________
Job's specified gpm (l/s) (if available): ____________________
NOTE: If unit has low fluid flow, find source of problem: check fluid piping, in-line fluid strainer, shut-off valves,
chilled water pump rotation, etc.
VISUALLY CHECK MAIN BASE BOARD FOR THE FOLLOWING:
Inspect all thermistors and transducers for possible crossed wires. Check to be sure all well-type thermistors are
fully inserted into their respective wells.
TO START THE CHILLER:
Turn the emergency on/off switch (SW2) to on position.
Turn the enable/off/remote control switch (SW1) to the enable position.
If equipped with the optional scrolling marquee, leave the enable/off/remote control switch (SW1) in the off
position.
NOTE: Use escape key to go up one level in the structure.
Use arrow/escape keys to illuminate run status led. Press ENTER key until 'VERS' is displayed. Press ENTER key.
Record information.
Record Software Versions

MODE — RUN STATUS
SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS
MBB CESR131482-xx-xx
EXV CESR131172-xx-xx
EMM CESR131174-xx-xx
VERS
AUX1 CESR131333-xx-xx
MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx
NAVI CESR130227-xx-xx
(Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to obtain software versions)
CL-3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Use arrow/escape keys to illuminate configuration LED. Press ENTER key. Record information below.
UNIT (Configuration Settings)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY
UNIT CONFIGURATION
TYPE UNIT TYPE
SIZE UNIT SIZE XXX
SZA.1 COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE XX
SZA.2 COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE XX
UNIT SZA.3 COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE XX
SZB.1 COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE XX
A1.TY COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL? NO/YES
MAX.T MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME XX
EXV EXV MODULE INSTALLED? NO/YES
DITYP DISCHARGE GAS THERM TYPE X

Press ESCAPE key to display ‘UNIT’. Press down arrow key to display ‘OPT1’.
Press ENTER key. Record configuration information below:
OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration)

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
FLUD COOLER FLUID X
MLV.S MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT NO/YES
RG.EN RETURN GAS SENSOR ENABLE DSBL/ENBL
OAT.E ENABLE OAT SENSOR DSBL/ENBL
CSB.E CSB BOARDS ENABLE DSBL/ENBL
OPT1
CPC COOLER PUMP CONTROL OFF/ON
PM.DY COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY XX MIN
D.PM.E ENABLE CONDENSER PUMP DSBL/ENBL
D.FL.S ENABLE COND FLOW SWITCH DSBL/ENBL
CDWS ENABLE COND WTR SENSORS DSBL/ENBL

H.CND HIGH CONDENSING ENABLE DSBL/ENBL
Press ESCAPE key to display ‘OPT1’. Press down arrow key to display ‘OPT2’.
Press ENTER key.
Record configuration information below.
OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration)

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
CTRL CONTROL METHOD X
OPT2 LCWT HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT XX.X F
DELY MINUTES OFF TIME XX
ICE.M ICE MODE ENABLE DSBL/ENBL
CL-4
Press ESCAPE key to display ‘OPT2’. Press down arrow key to display ‘EXV.A’.
Press ENTER key.
EXV.A (Circuit A EXV Configuration)
SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

EXV.L EXV OPENING AT LOW LWT XX%
LWT.L LWT FOR EXV MIN OPENING XX° F
EXV.H EXV OPENING AT HIGH LWT XX%
LWT.H LWT FOR EXV MAX OPENING XX° F
MIN.A EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION XXX
RNG.A EXVA STEPS IN RANGE XXXXX
SPD.A EXVA STEPS PER SECOND XXXXX
POF.A EXVA FAIL POSITION IN% XXX
MIN.A EXVA MINIMUM STEPS XXXXX
EXV.A MAX.A EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS XXXXX
OVR.A EXVA OVERRUN STEPS XXX
TYP.A EXVA STEPPER TYPE 0,1
H.SCT HIGH SCT THRESHOLD XXX
X.PCT OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP XX
X.PER MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL XX
DELY LAG START DELAY XXX
L.DL.T LOW SH DELTA T - EXV MOVE XXX
SHR.T EXV RATE THRESHOLD XX.X F
L.EX.M LOW SH OVERRIDE EXV MOVE X.X%
Press ESCAPE key to display ‘EXV.A’. Press down arrow key to display ‘CCN’.
Press ENTER key.
CCN (CCN Network Configuration)
SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

CCNA CCN ADDRESS XXX
CCN CCNB CCN BUS NUMBER XXX
BAUD CCN BAUD RATE X
Press ESCAPE key several times to get to the mode level (blank display). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the set
point LED. Press ENTER to display setpoints.
Record configuration information below:
SETPOINT
COOLING SETPOINTS
CSP.1 COOLING SETPOINT 1 XXX.X °F
COOL
CSP.2 COOLING SETPOINT 2 XXX.X °F
CSP.3 ICE SETPOINT XXX.X °F
HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS
HEAD
H.DP HEAD SET POINT XXX.X °F
BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT
FRZ
BR.FZ BRINE FREEZE POINT XX.X °F
CL-5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMPONENT TEST
Use escape/arrow keys to illuminate configuration LED. Press enter to display 'DISP'. press enter again to display
'TEST' followed by 'OFF'. Press enter to stop display at 'OFF' and enter again so 'OFF' display flashes. 'PASS' and
'WORD' will flash if password needs to be entered. Press enter to display 'PASSWORD' field and use the enter key
for each of the four password digits. Use arrow keys if password is other than standard. At flashing 'OFF' display,
press the up arrow key to display 'ON' and press enter. All LED segments and mode LEDs will light up. Press
escape to stop the test. Press escape to return to the 'DISP' display. Press the escape key again and use the
arrow keys to illuminate the Service Test LED. Press enter to display 'TEST'. Press enter to stop display at 'OFF'
and enter again so 'OFF' flashes. Press the up arrow key and enter to enable the manual mode. Press escape and
display now says 'TEST' 'ON'. Turn switch (SW1) to the enable position.
Press the down arrow to display 'OUTS'. Press the enter key to display 'LL.SV'. Press the enter key to stop display
at 'OFF' and enter again so 'OFF' flashes. Press the up arrow key and enter to turn the output on. Press enter so
the 'ON' display flashes, press the down arrow key, and then enter to turn the output off. Outputs will also be
turned off or sent to 0% when another output is turned on. Check off the items in the service test table on the next
page that apply after being tested.
Use escape key to return to ‘OUTS’ display. press down arrow to display ‘CMPA’. Press enter key to display
‘CC.A1’. note that unloaders and hot gas bypass solenoids can be tested both with and without compressor(s)

running. Make sure all service valves are open and cooler/condenser pumps have been turned on before starting
compressors. Check off each item after successful test. The control will only start one compressor per minute.
When at the desired item, press the enter key twice to make the ‘OFF’ flash. Press the up arrow key and enter to
turn the output on. Check off the items in the service test table below that apply after being tested.
SERVICE TEST
SUB-MODE KEYPAD ITEM DISPLAY ITEM COMMENT Completed

ENTRY EXPANSION (Yes/No)
OFF/ON SERVICE TEST MODE To Enable Service Test Mode,
ENTER
move Enable/Off/Remote
TEST Contact switch to OFF. Change
TEST to ON. Move switch to
ENABLE.
OUTPUTS AND PUMPS
ENTER CLR.P OFF/ON COOLER PUMP RELAY
CND.P OFF/ON CONDENSER PUMP
UL.TM 0 TO 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CC.H OFF/ON CRANKCASE HEATER
OUTS
CW.VO OFF/ON CONDENSER VALVE OPEN
CW.VC OFF/ON CONDENSER VALVE CLOSE
LL.SV OFF/ON LIQUID LINE SOLENOID
RMT.A OFF/ON REMOTE ALARM RELAY
EXV.A XXX% EXV% OPEN
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

ENTER CC.A1 OFF/ON COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY
UL.TM 0 TO 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CMPA
CC.A2 OFF/ON COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY
CC.A3 OFF/ON COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY
MLV OFF/ON MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

CMPB
ENTER CC.B1 OFF/ON COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY
CL-6
ALL UNITS:
Measure the following (measure while machine is in a stable operating condition): Check and adjust superheat as
required.
CIRCUIT B
CIRCUIT A
(032 ONLY)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE (DP.A)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE (DP.B)
SUCTION PRESSURE (SP.A)
SUCTION PRESSURE (SP.B)
SATURATED CONDENSING TEMPERATURE (SCT.A)
SATURATED CONDENSING TEMPERATURE (SCT.B)
SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE (SST.A)
SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE (SST.B)
DISCHARGE LINE TEMP (D.GAS)
SUCTION LINE TEMP E (RGT.A)
SUCTION LINE TEMP E (RGT.B)
COOLER ENTERING FLUID (C.EWT)
COOLER LEAVING FLUID (C.LWT)
CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID (C.DET)
CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID (C.DLT)
EXV POSITION (UNIT SIZES 050-071) (EXV.A)
Check and adjust superheat as required.
COMMENTS:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SIGNATURES:
START-UP TECHNICIAN ____________________________ DATE ______________________________
CUSTOMER REPRESENTATIVE ______________________ DATE ______________________________
CL-7
© 2019 Carrier Corporation
Catalog No. 04-53300181-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-5T Rev. A CL-8 11-19
Replaces: 30MP-4T
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AquaSnap®

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Unit Run Outputs Head Month,

and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-5

NOTE: Not to scale.

LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH

STATUS SIO (LEN)

NOTE: Not to scale.

Fig. 6 — AUX Board

SW1 OFF SW2

Fig. 7 — Scrolling Marquee, Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and

Fig. 8 — CCN Wiring Diagram

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) — This SEN

rationOPT1OAT.E=ENBL) and include broadcast informa-

SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SENSOR 4

SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3

SENSOR 4 SENSOR 5 SENSOR 6

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 9 SENSOR APPLICATION

Fig. 12 — Space Temperature Averaging

GREEN LED - ADDRESS

Fig. 13 — Energy Management Module

Table 15 — Time Required Configuration

* Energy management module (EMM) required for operation.

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Printer interface Module,

Fig. 16 — Alarm Routing Control

ENTER CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2 CTRL ENTER 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

ENTER CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

ENTER DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

LLEN ENTER DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

ENTER ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL ENTER MAST MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST

ENTER 0 SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER 0 VALUE FLASHES

ENTER 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

ENTER 0 SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER 2 LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLBD ENTER 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168

LLDY LAG START DELAY

ENTER 5 VALUE FLASHES

ENTER 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED

PARA ENTER YES MASTER COMPLETE

ENTER CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2 CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

CCNA ENTER 1 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER 1 VALUE FLASHES

CCNB ENTER 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

ENTER CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN ENTER DSBL SCROLLING STOPS